अनक्र

ु म ांक/ROLL NO सेट / SET: 1

केंद्रीय विद्यालय संगठन ,जयपरु संभाग

KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, JAIPUR REGION
प्रथम प्री बोर्ड परीक्षा / 1st PRE BOARD EXAMINATION :2024-25
कक्ष / CLASS: XII
विषय /SUB: PHYSICS (कोड / CODE:042)
अधिकतम आिधि / Time Allowed: 3 Hours अधिकतम अांक / Maximum Marks: 70
स म न्य ननर्दे श / General Instructions:
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section
E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based
questions of 1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C
contains seven questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study-based
questions of four marks each and Section E contains three long answer questions of five
marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one question
in Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all three
questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
a. C = 3 x108 m/s
b. Me = 9.1x10-31 kg
c. Mp = 1.7x10-27 kg
d. e = 1.6x10-19 C
e. µ0 = 4πx10-7 Tm𝑨−𝟏
f. h = 6.63 x10-34 Js
g. ε0 = 8.854 x10-12 𝑪𝟐𝑵−𝟏𝒎−𝟐
h. Avogadro’s number = 6.023X𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟑 per gram mole

Q Section A Marks
No.

1 Electric potential on the surface of a metallic conductor is 7 Volt. Electric 1

potential inside the conductor is
(A) 14V (B) 7V (C) ZERO (D) data insufficient
2 A radio can tune any station in the 7.5MHz to 12 MHz What is the responding 1
wavelength band?
(A) 80m -25 m (B) 40m – 25m (C) 20m – 10m (D) 10m-25m

Page 1 of 7
3 According to Einstein’s photoelectric equation, the plot of the kinetic energy of 1
the emitted photo electrons from a metal versus the frequency of the incident
radiation gives a straight line whose slope
(A)Is the same for all metals and independent of the intensity of the radiation
(B)Depends on the intensity of the radiation
(C)Depends both on the intensity of the radiation and the metal used
(D)Depends on the nature of the metals used
4 A proton and an alpha particle are having same velocity. the ratio of their De 1
Broglie wave length is
(A) 1:2 (B) 2:1 (C) 1:4 (D) 4:1

5 Colors observed on a CD (Compact Disk) is due to 1

(A) Reflection (B) Diffraction (C) Dispersion (D) Absorption

6 A silver wire has a resistance of 2.1 Ω at 27.5 °C, and a resistance of 2.7 Ω at 100 1
°C. What is the temperature coefficient of resistivity of silver?

(A) 0.0059 (B) 0.0039 (C) 0.0129 (D) 0.0159

7 Give the number of electrons passing through a wire per minute. The current 1
flowing through it is 500mA.
(A) 1.875 × 1020 (B) 6.875 × 1020 (C) 1.875 × 10-20 (D) 6.875 × 10-20
8 A point object is placed at the centre of a glass sphere of radius 6 cm and 1
refractive index 1.5. The distance of virtual image from the surface of the sphere
is
(A) 2cm (B) 4cm (C) 6cm (D) 12cm
9 A Compound microscope uses an objective lens of focal length 4 cm and eyepiece 1
lens of focal length 10 cm. An object is placed at 6 cm from the objective lens. The
magnifying power of the compound microscope if final image is formed at
infinity is
(A)6 ( B) 10 (C) 12 (D) 5

10 During Faraday’s electromagnetic induction experiment the mechanical efforts 1

of movement of magnet near a coil produces electrical energy within the coil.
This phenomenon can be best explained on the basis of:
(A) Lenz’s law and conservation of energy
(B) Lenz’s law and conservation of charge
(C) Faraday’s law and conservation of energy
(D) None of the above
11 Two thin lenses of power +4D and -2D are placed in contact focal length of the 1
combination is
(A) 10cm (B) 50cm (C) 40cm (D) 2cm
12 The mass number of two nuclei are in the ratio 27:125. The ratio of their nuclear 1
radii is .
(A)1:1 (B) 3:4 (C) 5:3 (D) 3:5
For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labeled Assertion

Page 2 of 7
 (A) and other labeled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these
questions from the options as given below.
A. If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of
Assertion.
B. If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct
explanation of Assertion.
C. If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
D. If both Assertion and Reason are false.

Assertion (A): When two coils are wound on each other, the mutual induction 1
13 between coil is maximum
Reason(R) -- Mutual induction doesn’t depends on the orientation of the coils

14 Assertion (A): On increasing the current sensitivity of a galvanometer by 1

increasing the number of turns may not necessarily increase its voltage
sensitivity.
Reason(R) : The resistance of the coil of the galvanometer increases on
increasing the number of turns.
15 Assertion (A): de Broglie's wavelength of a freely falling body keeps decreasing 1
with time.
Reason (R): The momentum of the freely falling body increases with time.
16 Assertion (A) : No interference pattern is detected when two coherent sources 1
are infinitely close to each other.
Reason( R) : The fringe width is inversely proportional to the distance between
the two slits.
SECTION-B
17 Identify the following part of electromagnetic spectrum and arrange them as per 2
descending order of their wavelength.
(a) Produced by Klystron valve
(b) Used in Remote control
(c) Widely used in medical science
(d) Absorbed by ozone layer
18 Derive the relation between drift velocity Vd of electrons and current I flowing in 2
a conductor having area of cross section A.
19 A 0.5m long solenoid of 10 turns/cm has area of cross-section 1cm2. Calculate 2
the voltage induced across its ends if the current in the solenoid is changed from
1A to 2A in 0.1 sec.
20 Draw a graph showing the variation of stopping potential with frequency of 2
incident radiation in relation to photoelectric effect. Deduce an expression for
the slope of graph using Einstein’s photo electric equation.
OR
Write Einstein’s photo electric equation Using this equation find out what
changes will occur in the following quantities if the frequency of incident
radiation on a photocell is doubled for the same intensity, (i) kinetic energy of
photo electrons emitted (ii) photoelectric current (iii) Work Function

Page 3 of 7
 2
Draw the energy band diagram for N-type and P-type semiconductor at
21 (i) T=0K and (ii) room temperature.

SECTION-C
22 If a nucleus 26Fe56 splits into two nuclei of 13 Al28, would the energy be released or 3
needed for this purpose to occur? Given mass (26 Fe56) = 55.934944 & mass
(13 Al28 ) = 27.98191, 1u = 931MeV/c2 Calculate the energy in MeV.
23 Find the expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor of plate area 3
A and plate separation d when a dielectric slab of thickness t (t < d) is introduced
between the plates of the capacitor. What is capacitance if, metal slab of same
thickness is used?
24 Using kircchoff’s laws find out the value of current I1, I2 and I3. 3

25 A plane wavefront (AB) is incident on a refracting surface XY. Using Huygen’s 3

principle verify the laws of refraction if the rays incident from denser medium.
26 State Bohr’s postulate for the permitted orbits for the electron in a hydrogen 3
atom. Use this postulate to prove that the circumference of the nth permitted
orbit for the electron can contain exactly ‘n’ wavelengths of the de-Broglie
wavelength associated with the electron in that orbit.
OR
Find out longest and shortest wave length of Balmer series of Hydrogen
spectrum. In which region of electromagnetic spectrum does it belongs?
27 In a two slit experiment with monochromatic light, fringes are obtained on a 3
screen placed at some distance D from the slits . if the screen is moved 5 X 10-2
m towards the slits , the change in fringe width is 3 X 10-5 m. if the distance
between the slits is 10-3 m, calculate the wavelength of the light used.

Page 4 of 7
28 Differentiate between Para , Ferro and Dia magnetic substances in respect of 3
following parameters
i) Behaviour in presence of external magnetic field
ii) Relative magnetic permeability
iii) Effect of temperature
Also write one example each of Para, Ferro and Dia magnetic substances

SECTION-D
29 Optical fibers: Now-a-days optical fibers are extensively used for transmitting 4
audio and video signals through long distances. Optical fibers too make use of
the phenomenon of total internal reflection. Optical fibers are fabricated with
high quality composite glass/quartz fibers. Each fiber consists of a core and
cladding. The refractive index of the material of the core is higher than that of the
cladding. When a signal in the form of light is directed at one end of the fiber at a
suitable angle, it undergoes repeated total internal reflections along the length of
the fiber and finally comes out at the other end. Since light undergoes total
internal reflection at each stage, there is no appreciable loss in the intensity of
the light signal. Optical fibers are fabricated such that light reflected at one side
of inner surface strikes the other at an angle larger than the critical angle. Even if
the fiber is bent, light can easily travel along its length. Thus, an optical fiber can
be used to act as an optical pipe.

(i) Which of the following statement is not true.

(A) Optical fibers is based on the principle of total internal reflection.
(B) The refractive index of the material of the core is less than that of the
cladding.
(C) An optical fiber can be used to act as an optical pipe.
(D) There is no appreciable loss in the intensity of the light signal while
propagating through an optical fiber.
(ii) What is the condition for total internal reflection to occur?
(A) angle of incidence must be equal to the critical angle.
(B) angle of incidence must be less than the critical angle.
(C) angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle.
(D) None of the above.
(iii) Which of the following is not an application of total internal reflection?
(A) Mirage (B) Sparkling of diamond
(C) Splitting of white light through a prism. (D) Totally reflecting prism

(iv) Optical fibers are used extensively to transmit

(A) Optical Signal (B) current (C) Sound waves (D) None of the above
Page 5 of 7
 OR
(iv) If the critical angle for total internal reflection from a medium to vacuum is
30°, the velocity of light in the medium is
(A) 3 × 108m/s (B) 6 × 108 m/s (C) 1.5 × 108 m/s (D) 15 × 108 m/s

30 The galvanometer is a device used 4

to detect the current flowing in a
circuit or a small potential
difference applied to it. It consists
of a coil with many turns, free to
rotate about a fixed axis, in a
uniform radial magnetic field
formed by using concave pole
pieces of a magnet. When a current
flows through the coil, a torque acts
on it.

(i) What is the principle of moving coil galvanometer?

(A) Torque acting on a current carrying coil placed in a uniform magnetic field.
(B) Torque acting on a current carrying coil placed in a non-uniform magnetic
field.
(C) Potential difference developed in the current carrying coil.
(D) None of these.

(ii) If the field is radial, then the angle between magnetic moment of
galvanometer coil and the magnetic field
(A) 0° (B) 30° (C) 60° (D)90°

(iii) Why pole pieces are made concave in the moving coil galvanometer?
(A) to make the magnetic field radial.
(B) to make the magnetic field uniform.
(C) to make the magnetic field non-uniform.
(D) none of these.

(iv) A galvanometer can be converted to ammeter by connecting

(A)Very high resistance in parallel with the galvanometer
(B)Very low resistance in series with the galvanometer
(C)Very low resistance in parallel with the galvanometer
(D)Very High resistance in series with the galvanometer

OR
(iv)A galvanometer can be converted to voltmeter by connecting
(A)Very high resistance in parallel with the galvanometer
(B)Very low resistance in series with the galvanometer
(C)Very low resistance in parallel with the galvanometer
(D)Very High resistance in series with the galvanometer

Page 6 of 7
 SECTION-E
31 (a) Using phasor diagram, drive an expression for the impedance of a series LCR 5
circuit. What do you mean by resonance condition of such a circuit?
(b) (b) Resonant frequency of a series LCR circuit is f find out change in resonant
frequency when inductance, Resistance and Capacitance each become half of
its initial value.
OR
(a) With the help of a labelled diagram explain the principle, construction and
working of a transformer.
(b) A transformer having efficiency of 90% is working on 200 V and 3 kW power
supply. If the current in the secondary coil is 6 A, find out the voltage across the
secondary coil and the current in the primary coil .
32 (a) With the help of circuit diagram explain the working of full wave rectifier. 5
Also draw input and output waveform
(b) A circuit shown in the figure contains two
diodes each with a forward resistance 60ohm and
infinite backward resistance calculate the current
in the 100ohm resistance

OR

(a)With the help of circuit diagram explain the working

of half wave rectifier. Also draw input and output
waveform
(b)Two semi-conductor materials X and Y shown in the
figure are made by doping a Ge crystal with Indium and
Arsenic respectively .They are joined end to end and
connected to a battery as shown
i) Will the junction be forward bias or
reverse bias
ii) Sketch a V-I graph for this arrangement

33 (a)State Gauss᾿s theorem in electrostatics. Using this theorem, derive an 5

expression for the electric field due to an infinitely long straight wire of
linear charge density .
(b)Two point charges q1 = 3 μC and q2 = –3 μC are located 20 cm apart in
vacuum.
(i) What is the electric field at the midpoint O of the line AB joining the two
charges?
(ii) If a negative test charge of magnitude 1.5 × 10–9 C is placed at this point, what
is the force experienced by the test charge?

OR
(a)Define electric flux and write its SI unit. Use Gauss᾿s law to obtain the
expression for the electric field due to a uniformly charged infinite plane
sheet of charge.
(b) A point charge causes an electric flux of –1.0 × 103 Nm2/C to pass through a
spherical Gaussian surface of 10.0 cm radius centered on the charge.
(i) If the radius of the Gaussian surface were doubled, how much flux would pass
through the surface?
(ii) What is the value of the point charge?

Page 7 of 7
 सेट / SET: 1
MARKING SCHEME
केंद्रीय विद्यालय संगठन ,जयपरु संभाग
KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, JAIPUR REGION
1st- PRE BOARD EXAMINATION :2024-25
कक्षा / CLASS: XII
विषय /SUB: PHYSICS (कोड / CODE:042)
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 70

Q.No. Model Answer Marks

1 B 1
2 B 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 B 1
6 B 1
7 A 1
8 C 1
9 D 1
10 A 1
11 B 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 A 1
17 a) Microwave b) Infrared c) X-Ray d) UV Ray 1

Microwave > Infrared > UV Ray > X-Ray 1

18 Correct Derivation of I =neAVd 2

19 Correct formula of self-inductance 1
Calculation of emf e = 6.28 X 10-4 V 1
20 Correct graph 1
Correct derivation of slop of graph = h/e 1

OR
Einstein photo electric equation ½
i) Kinetic energy become more than double
 ii) No change in photo current ½
iii) No change in Work function ½
½

21 Diagram for N-type semi-conductor ½ +½

Diagram for P-type semi-conductor ½ +½

22 m(26 Fe56) + Q → 2 (13 Al28 ) 1

Δm = 2 x (27.98191)u - 55.934944 u 1
= -0.02888 u
Energy needed = 0.02888 x 931MeV = 26.88728 MeV 1

23 Correct diagram of parallel plate capacitor with dielectric slab 1

Derivation of capacitance 1+½

Effect of metal sheet ( Dielectric constant of metal is infinite) ½

24 Three equations using Kirchhoff’s law’s 1+½

Calculation of current I1 =2.5 A I2 =5/8A I3 = 15/8A 1+½

25 Diagram of refraction using Huygens’s principle 1

Derivation of Snell’s law
2
26 Bohr Postulates 1
Proof of circumference = n
OR 2
Rydberg relation for wavelength 1

Longest wavelength = 655.9nm 1

Shortest wavelength = 364.4nm 1

27 Formula for fringe width (D/d) 1

Calculation of wavelength  = 600nm
2
28 Difference between Para ,Ferro and Dia magnetic substances ½,½,½,

Example of Para ,Ferro and Dia magnetic substances ½,½,½,

 29 i)B ii) C iii) C iv) A OR C 1x4=4

30 i)A ii) D iii) A iv) C OR D 1x4=4

31 a) Phasor diagram 1
Derivation of impedence 1
Resonance 1
b) Formula of resonant frequency 1
New resonant frequency =2f 1

OR
a) Principle 1
Labeled diagram 1
Working 1
b) Formula for efficiency ½
IP =15A ½
ES = 450V 1
32 a) Circuit Diagram 1
Working 1
Input- Output wave form 1

b) Total resistance =360ohm 1

Current I= (1/60)A 1
OR
a) Circuit diagram 1
Working 1
Input- Output wave form 1
b) Identification of semiconductor X= P- type ½
Y= N-type ½
i) Reverse Bias ½
ii) V-I graph of reverse Bias ½

33 a) Gauss’s theorem 1
Diagram 1
Derivation of electric field E= 2(K /r ) 1

b) i) 5.4 x106N/C 1
ii)8.1 X 10-3N 1

OR
a) Definition and unit of flux 1
Diagram 1
Derivation of electric field due to plane sheet 1
b) i) -103Nm2/C 1
ii) -8.8nC 1
 SET: 1

KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

AGRA REGION
FIRST PRE-BOARD EXAM 2024-25
CLASS: XII
SUBJECT- PHYSICS(THEORY)

Max. Marks : 70 Time: 3 hours

____________________________________________________________________

General Instructions:
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D
and Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion
Reasoning based of 1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks
each, Section C contains seven questions of three marks each, Section D contains
two case study-based questions of four marks each and Section E contains three
long answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one
question in
Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all
three
questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
i. c = 3 x 108 m/s
ii. me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
iii. e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
iv. µ0 = 4π x 10-7 Tm𝑨−𝟏
v. h = 6.63 x10-34 Js
i. ε0 = 8.854 x10-12 𝑪𝟐𝑵−𝟏𝒎−𝟐
vii. Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟑 per gram mole

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
1
 (SECTION-A) (16x1=16)
Q.NO. QUESTIONS Marks
01 In a Wheatstone bridge, all the four arms have equal resistance R. if 1
resistance of the galvanometer arm is also R, then equivalent resistance of the
combination is
(a) R (b) 2R (c) R/2 (d) R/4
02 When a ferromagnetic material is heated above the curie temperature it 1
becomes:
(a) Diamagnetic (b) Paramagnetic (c) Strongly charged (d) Non-
Magnetic
03 One requires 11 eV of energy to dissociate a carbon monoxide molecule into 1
carbon and oxygen atoms. The minimum frequency of the appropriate
electromagnetic radiation to achieve the dissociation lies in
(a) visible region (b) infrared region
(c) ultraviolet region (d) microwave region
04 In an experiment of single slit diffraction, the width of a slit 1.2µm and the 1
angular width of centre maximum is observed to be equal to 𝝅 /𝟑 find the
wavelength of light
(a) 6 A0 (b) 60 A0 (c) 600A0 (d) 6000A0
05 A nucleus of mass number 189 splits into two nuclei having mass no125 and 1
64.the ratio of radius of daughter nuclei respective is
(a) 25:16 (b) 1:1 (c) 4:5 (d) 5:4
06 The electrostatic potential on the surface of a charged conducting sphere is 1
100V. Two statements are made in this regard S1 at any point inside the
sphere, electric intensity is zero. S2 at any point inside the sphere, the
electrostatic potential is 100V. Which of the following is a correct statement?

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
2
 (a) S1 is true but S2 is false
(b) Both S1 and S2 are false
(c) S1 is true, S2 is also true and S1 is the cause of S2
(d) S1 is true, S2 is also true but the statements are independent
07 In figure two positive charges q2 and q3 fixed along the y-axis, exert a net 1
electric force in the +x-direction on a charge q1, fixed along the x-axis. If a
positive charge Q is added at (x, 0), the force on q1

(a) shall increase along the positive x-axis

(b) shall decrease along the positive x-axis
(c) shall point along the negative x-axis
(d) shall increase but the direction changes because of the intersection of Q
with q2 and q3
08 A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 12 Ω and the metre shows full scale 1
deflection for a current of 3 mA. How will you convert the metre into a
voltmeter of range 0 to 18 V?
(a) 5888 ohm in series (b) 5888 ohm in parallel
c) 5988 ohm in series (d) 5988 ohms in parallel
09 The current I in a coil varies with time as shown in figure below. 1

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
3
 The variation of induced e.m.f. with time would be:

10 The stopping potential as a work function of frequency of incident radiation 1

is plotted for two different photo electric surfaces A and B. The graphs show
the work function of A is

(a) greater than that of B

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
4
 (b) smaller than that of B
(c) same as that of B
(d) no comparison can be done from given graph
11 In an interference pattern produced by two coherent sources of light, the 1
position of the dark fringe corresponds to:
(a) Zero path difference ( b) Quarter wavelength path
difference
(c) Wavelength path difference (d) Odd multiple of half-wavelength
path difference
12 If refractive index of water is 5/3. A light source is placed in water at a depth 1
of 4 m. Then what must be the minimum radius of disc placed on water
surface so that the light of source can be stopped?

(a). 5m (b). 4m (c). 3m (d). Infinity

For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labeled Assertion (A)
and other labeled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions
from the options as given below.

A. If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct
explanation of Assertion.
B. If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct
explanation of Assertion.
C. If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
D. If both Assertion and Reason are false.
13 Assertion (A): A charged capacitor is disconnected from a battery. Now, if 1
its plates are separated further, the potential energy will fall.

Reason (R): Energy stored in a capacitor is not equal to the work done in
charging it

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
5
14 Assertion (A): A bulb connected in series with a solenoid is connected to ac 1
source. If a soft iron core is introduced in the solenoid, the bulb will glow
brighter.

Reason((R) : On introducing soft iron core in the solenoid, the inductance

decreases.
15 Assertion (A): In Young's double-slit experiment, if one of the slits is 1
covered, the interference pattern disappears.

Reason (R): Interference occurs due to the superposition of waves from two
coherent sources
16 Assertion(A): The depletion layer in p-n junction under forward bias 1
decreases.

Reason(R): The electric field due to external voltage supports the electric
field due to potential barrier.
[SECTION – B] (05x2=10 marks)
17 A cylindrical conductor of length l and cross-section area A is connected to a 1+1
DC source. Under the influence of electric field set up due to source, the free
electrons begin to drift in the opposite direction of the electric field.

(I)Draw the curve showing the dependency of drift velocity on relaxation

time.

(II) If the DC source is replaced by a source whose current changes its

magnitude with time such that I = Io sin 2πνt , where ν is the frequency of
variation of current, then determine the average drift velocity of the free
electrons over one complete cycle.
18 Two long parallel straight wires X and Y separated by a distance of 5 cm in 1.5+0.5

air carry current of 10 A and 5 A respectively in opposite directions.

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
6
 Calculate the magnitude and direction of the force on a 20 cm length of the
wire Y.
19 A single slit of width 0.1 mm is illuminated by a parallel beam of light of 2
wavelength 6000 A and diffraction bands are observed on a screen 0.5 m
from the slit. Find the distance of the third dark band from the central bright
band .
20 Binding energy per nucleon versus mass number curve is as shown. X,Y,W 1+1
and S are four nuclei indicated on the curve.

Based on the graph

(a) Arrange X, W and S in the increasing order of stability.

(b) Explain why binding energy for heavy nuclei is low.

21 Draw the circuit diagram of full wave rectifier and also draw its input and 1+1/2
output wave forms. +1/2
OR
OR
How is forward biasing different from reverse biasing in a p-n junction
2
diode?
[SECTION – C ] (07x3=21 marks)

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
7
22 a) Use Gauss’s theorem to find the electric field due to a uniformly charged 1.5+1.5

infinitely large plane thin sheet with surface charge density

(b) An infinitely large plane thin sheet has a uniform surface charge density.
Obtain the expression for the amount of work done in bringing a point charge
q from infinite to a point, distance d , in front of the charged plane sheet. Or
OR 1+2

State Gauss᾿s theorem in electrostatics. Using this theorem, derive an

expression for the electric field due to an infinitely long straight wire of
linear charge density .
23 A cell of emf ‘E’ and internal resistance ‘r’ is connected across a variable 1+1+1
load resistor R. Draw the plots of the terminal voltage V versus
(i) R
(ii) the current I.
(iii) It is found that when R = 4 Ω, the current is 1 A and when R is increased
to 9 Ω, the current reduces to 0.5 A. Find the values of the emf E and internal
resistance r.
24 A bar magnet of magnetic moment 1.5 J T –1 lies aligned with the direction of 1+1+
a uniform magnetic field of 0.22 T 1/2+
1/2
(a) What is the torque on the magnet when magnetic moment aligned (i)
Normal to the field direction (ii) Opposite to the field direction

(b) Write the conditions for (i) stable equilibrium (ii) unstable
equilibrium of magnet.
25 A device ‘X’ is connected to an AC source. The variation of voltage, current
and power in one complete cycle is shown in figure.

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
8
 1
(a) Which curve shows power consumption over a full cycle? 1
(b) What is the average power consumption over a cycle? 1
(c) Identify the device X.
26 Name the e.m. waves in the wavelength range 10 nm to 10-3 nm. How are 1+1+1
these waves generated? Write their two uses.
27 Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of the image of an object placed 3
on the axis of a convex refracting surface, of radius of curvature ‘R’,
separating the two media of refractive indices ‘n1’ and ‘n2’ (n2 > n1). Use this
diagram to deduce the relation

where u and v represent respectively the distance of the

object and the image formed.

28 The given graph shows the variation of photocurrent for a photosensitive
metal:
1/2+1/
2+1+1

(a) Identify the variable X on the horizontal axis.

(b) What does the point A on the horizontal axis represent?
(c) Draw this graph for three different values of frequencies of incident
radiation v1 v2 and v3 (v1 > v2 > v3) for same intensity.

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
9
 (d) Draw this graph for three different values of intensities of incident
radiation I1 I2 and I3 (I1 > I2 > I3) having same frequency.

SECTION D (02x4=08 marks)

29 Case Study Based Question: Semiconductor 1x4

There are different techniques of fabrication of p-n junction. In one such

technique, called fused junction techniques, an aluminum film is kept on the
wafer of n-type semiconductor and the combination is then heated to a high
temperature (about 600 °C). As a result, aluminum fused into silicon and
produces p-type semiconductor and in this way p-n junction is formed.

(i) when a PN junction is reversed then how does the height of potential
barrier change?

(a) no current flows (b) the depletion region is reduced

(c) height of potential barrier is decreased (d) height of potential barrier is

increased

(ii) the cause of potential barrier in PN junction is:

(a) depletion of positive charges near the junction

(b) concentration of negative charges near the junction

(c) concentration of positive and negative charges near the junction

(d) depletion of negative charges near the junction

(iii) The circuit has two oppositely connected ideal diodes in parallel.
What is the current flowing in the circuit ?
KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
10
 (a) 1.17 A (b) 2.0 A (c) 1.71 A (d) 1.

(iv) Carbon, Germanium and silicon are 14th group elements:

(a) C and Ge are semiconductors (b) C and Si are semiconductor

c) all C, Ge and Si are semiconductors (d) Si and Ge are semiconductors

Or
When a PN junction is forward biased then:
(a) only diffusion current flows
(b) both diffusion current and drift current flow but diffusion current is
more than drift current
(c) only drift current flows
(d) both diffusion and drift current flow but drift current exceeds the
diffusion current.
30 Case Study Based Question: Electrostatics 1x4

An arrangement of two conductors separated by an insulating medium can be

used to store electric charge and electric energy. Such a system is called a
capacitor.

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
11
The more charge a capacitor can store, the greater is its capacitance. Usually,
a capacitor consists of two conductors having equal and opposite charge +Q
and -Q. Hence, there is a potential difference V between them. By the
capacitance of a capacitor, we mean the ratio of the charge Q to the potential
difference V. By the charge on a capacitor we mean only the charge Q on the
positive plate. Total charge of the capacitor is zero. The capacitance of a
capacitor is a constant and depends on geometric factors, such as the shapes,
sizes and relative positions of the two conductors, and the nature of the
medium between them. The unit of capacitance is farad (F), but the more
convenient units are µF and pF. A commonly used capacitor consists of two
long strips or metal foils, separated by two long strips of dielectrics, rolled up
into a small cylinder. Common dielectric materials are plastics (such as
polyesters and polycarbonates) and aluminium oxide. Capacitors are widely
used in radio, television, computer, and other electric circuits.

1. A parallel plate capacitor C has a charge Q . The actual charge on its plates
are

(a) Q,Q (b) Q/2, Q/2 (c) Q ,-Q (d) Q/2, -Q/2

2. A parallel plate capacitor is charged. If the plates are pulled apart .

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
12
 (a) the capacitance increases (b) the potential difference increases

(c ) the total charge increases (d) the charge & potential difference
remains the same

3. Three capacitors of 2 , 3 & 6 µF are connected in series to a 10 V source.

The charge on the 3 µF capacitor is

(a) 5µC (b) 10µC (c) 12µC (d) 15µC

4. If n capacitors each of capacitance C are connected in series and then in

parallel, then the ratio of equivalent capacitance of the series combination to
parallel combination is

(a) nC b) n2C (c) C/n (d) 1/n2

OR

A parallel plate capacitor has two square plates with equal and opposite
charges. The surface charge densities on the plates are + σ and - σ
respectively. In the region between the plates the magnitude of the electric
field is

(a) σ /ε0 (b) σ /2 ε0 (c) 0 (d) none of these

SECTION E 03x5= (15 marks)
31 (i) Three conductors form an equilateral triangle shown the figure below. The 3+
current direction of wire A is out of the plane of the figure, in B and C are 2

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
13
 into the plane of the figure.

Find:
a) the magnetic force acts on conductor B in a length of 1 m
b) the direction of the force
(ii) Write the mathematical expression for the force acting on a current
carrying straight conductor kept in a magnetic field. Under what conditions is
this force (i) zero and (ii) maximum?

OR
With the help of a neat and labelled diagram, explain the underlying principle Or
and working of a moving coil galvanometer. What is the function of (i)
uniform radial field (ii) soft iron core in such a device? 1+
1+
1+
1+
1
32 (a)Draw a ray diagram to show refraction of a ray of monochromatic light 1+2+2
passing through a glass prism. Deduce the expression for the refractive index
of glass in terms of angle of prism and angle of minimum deviation.

(b) A convex lens has 20 cm focal length in air. What is focal length in
water? (Refractive index of air-water = 1.33, refractive index for air-glass =
1.5.)

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
14
 OR Or

(a) Draw a labelled ray diagram to obtain the real image formed by an 1+1+2
astronomical telescope in normal adjustment position. Define its magnifying +1
power.

(b) You are given three lenses of power 0.5 D, 4 D and 10 D to design a
telescope.
(i) Which lenses should be used as objective and eyepiece? Justify your
answer.
(ii) Why is the aperture of the objective preferred to be large?

33 (i)Using Bohr’s postulates of the atomic model, derive the expression for 3+2
radius of nth electron orbit. Hence obtain the expression for Bohr’s radius.
(ii) According to the classical electromagnetic theory, calculate the initial
frequency of the light emitted by the electron revolving around a proton in
hydrogen atom. Or

OR
(i) In Rutherford scattering experiment, draw the trajectory traced by a-
3+2
particles in the Coulomb field of target nucleus and explain how this led to
estimate the size of the nucleus.

(ii) In a Geiger-Marsden experiment, what is the distance of closest approach

to the nucleus of a 7.7 MeV α-particle before it comes momentarily to rest
and reverses its direction?

----------------------------***********--------------------------

KVS/RO AGRA/PHY/SET-1
15
MARKING (XII-PHYSICS), PRE-BOARD-I SCHEME SET-I 2024-25
SECTION–A MAR
S.NO KS
1 a 1
2 b 1
3 c 1
4 d 1
5 d 1
6 c 1
7 a 1
8 c 1
9 a 1
10 b 1
11 d 1
12 c 1
13 (D) Battery is disconnected from the capacitor. So, Q= Const. 1
2 2
Energy = Q /2C = Q d/ 2 ε0 A. so energy ∝ d
14 (D) 1
15 (A) 1
16 (C) 1
SECTION B
17
(I) 𝑫𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒕 𝒗𝒆𝒍𝒐𝒄𝒊𝒕𝒚 ∝ 𝑹𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒙𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒊𝒎e
vd

(ii) Alternating current changes direction every half cycle.

So average drift velocity is zero ½
½

1
 18

19 a=0.1mm=10−4 λ=6000×10−10=6×10−7 D=0.5m

for 3rd dark a sinθ=3λ
sinθ = 3λ/a =x/D
x=3λD/ a 1
−7 -4
=3×6×10 ×0.5 / 10 ½
=9mm ½
20 (a) S,W,X 1
(b) Reason for low binding energy: In heavier nuclei, the Colombian repulsive effects can
increase considerably and can match/ offset the attractive effects of the nuclear forces. 1
This can result in such nuclei being unstable.

21

2
 ½+1/2

OR
1
1. Forward Bias: (i) Within the junction diode the direction of applied voltage is opposite to
that of built-in potential. (ii) The current is due to diffusion of majority charge carriers through
the junction and is of the order of milli amperes. (iii) The diode offers very small resistance in
1
the forward bias.
2. Reverse Bias: (i) The direction of applied voltage and barrier potential is same. (ii) The
current is due to leakage of minority charge carriers through the junction and is very small of
the order of μ A. (iii) The diode offers very large resistance in reverse bias.
[SECTION – C ]
22
Let σ be the surface charge density (charge per unit area) of the given sheet and let P be a
point at distance r from the sheet where we have to find E→

Choosing point P‟, symmetrical with P on the other side of the sheet, let us draw a Gaussian
cylindrical surface cutting through the sheet as shown in the diagram. As at the cylindrical
part of the Gaussian surface, E→ and dS→ are at a right angle, the only surfaces
having E→ and dS→ parallel are the plane ends

3
 ½

…[As E is outgoing from both plane ends, the flux is positive.

This is the total flux through the Gaussian surface.

This value is independent of r. „

(b) The electric field E = σ /2 ε0 is constant ½

Work done

OR

Gauss‟s law in electrostatics : It states that “the total electric flux over the surface S in vaccum
1
is 1/ε0 times the total charge (q).”

Electric field due to an infinitely long straight wire : Consider an infinitely long straight line
charge having linear charge density X to determine its electric field at distance r. Consider a
cylindrical Gaussian surface of radius r and length l coaxial with the charge. By symmetry,
the electric field E has same magnitude at each point of the curved surface S1 and is directed
radially outward. ½

4
 Total flux through the cylindrical surface,

23 1+1

24 (a) (i) τ = MB sin θ θ = 90° 1

τ = 1.5 x 0.22 x sin 90°

τ =1.5 x 0.22 × 1 = 0.33 Nm

(ii)θ = 180° τ = 1.5 x 0.22 x sin 180 °=0 1

1/2
0
(b)(i) 0
1/2
0
(ii) 180

25 Ans.(a) We know that Power = P = VI that is curve of power will be having maximum 1
5
 amplitude, equals to multiplication of amplitudes of voltage (V) and current (I) curve. So, the
curve will be represented by A.
(b)As shown by shaded area in the diagram, the full cycle of the graph consists of one
positive and one negative symmetrical area.

Hence, average power over a cycle is zero.

(c) As the average power is zero, hence the device may be inductor (L) or capacitor (C) or the
1
series combination of L and C
26  e.m. waves in the wavelength range 10 nm to 10-3 nm are X-rays. 1
 X-rays are generated by bombarding a metal target with high energy electrons. 1

• Uses :

½
1. Diagnosis of bone fractures.
½
2. Treatment of some forms of cancer.

27

Suppose all the rays are paraxial

Then the angles i, r, a, P and y will be small

6
 1

Using new Cartesian sign convention, we find

Object distance, OP = – u,
Image distance, PI = tv
Radius of curvature, PC = + R
1

28 (a) „X‟ is a collector plate potential. 1/2

½
(b) „A‟ represents the stopping potential.

(c) Graph for different frequencies :

7
 1

SECTION D
29 ((i) Ans. (d) Reason: in reverse biased p-n junction l, potential difference across a 1 mark
junction becomes [V+Vb] for each
(ii) Ans. (c)concentration of positive and negative charges near the junction correct
(iii) Ans. (c) Reason: D2 is reverse biased and D1 is forward biased. So, 2phm and 4 option
ohm are in series and connected to 12 V. Hence, I= 12/ (3+4) = 1.71A
(iv) Ans. (d) Si and Ge are semiconductors
Or
Ans. (b)
30 1.(c) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4.(d) OR (a)
SECTION E
31 (i) In the figure of forces acting on conductor B with the angles

Finding FBA :

8
 Finding FBC : ½

resultant named FB:

Insert your data :

b) Using vectors components to get the direction of the resultant :

9
 The result is 60o .

(ii)
  
F  I (l  B)

Or The magnitude of the force is F = I l B sin

(i) If =0 or 180 , then F = I l B(0) = 0
Thus a current carrying conductor placed parallel to the direction of the magnetic field
does not experience any force.
(ii) If =90 , then F = I l B sin90o or Fmax= I l B

Or 1
PRINCIPLE: It works on the principle that when a current loop is placed in an external
magnetic field, it experiences torque, and the value of torque can be changed by changing the
current in the loop Or

10
 Theory and working: As the field is radial, the plane of the coil always remains

parallel to the field B . When a current flows through the coil, a torque acts on it. It is
 = Force x perpendicular distance = NIbB x a sin 90 = NIB(ab) = NIBA
Here =90 , because the normal to the plane of coil remains perpendicular to the field

B in all positions.
The torque  deflects the coil through an angle . A restoring torque is set up in the
coil due to the elasticity of the springs such that
½
 restoring  k

Where k is the torsion constant of the springs i.e., torque required to produce unit
angular twist.
In equilibrium position,
Restoring torque = Deflecting torque
k = NIBA
NBAI

k
Thus the deflection produced in the galvanometer coil is proportional to the current
flowing through it.
Functions:
1
(i) A uniform magnetic field provides a linear current scale.
(ii) A soft iron core makes the field radial. It also increases the strength of the magnetic
field and hence increases the sensitivity of the galvanometer.

1
1
32 (a) Correct Ray diagram 1
Correct expression of refractive index of glass in terms of angle of prism and 1
angle of minimum deviation 1
(b)

11
 1

OR
(a) diagram

Or

1
1
Definition : It is the ratio of the angle subtended at the eye, by the final image, to the angle
which the object subtend at the lens, or the eye. 1
1
Or Magnifying power m = −f0/fe

(b) Objective = 0.5 D and eye lens = 10 D

Justification

12
 (ii) High resolving power/Brighter image/ lower limit of resolution.

33 (i) According to Bohr‟s postulates, angular momentum of electron for any permitted
orbit is,
1

Also, according to Bohr‟s postulates, the centripetal force is equal to electrostatic

force between the electron and nucleus.

(ii) we know that velocity of electron moving around a proton in hydrogen atom in 1
an orbit of radius 5.3×10–11 m is 2.2×10–6 m/s. Thus, the frequency of the
electron moving around the proton is
𝛎=υ/2πr =2.2×106ms−1 / 2π(5.3×10−11m) OR
15
≈6.6×10 Hz.
According to the classical electromagnetic theory we know that the frequency of
the electromagnetic waves emitted by the revolving electrons is equal to the
frequency of its revolution around the nucleus. Thus the initial frequency of the
light emitted is 6.6×1015 Hz.

OR

The trajectory, traced by the a -particles in the Coulomb field of target nucleus,
1
has the form shown below.

13
 The size of the nucleus was estimated by observing the distance (d) of closest Or
approach, of the a-particles. This distance is given by :

where K = kinetic energy of the a-particles when they are far away from the
target nuclei. 2

Let d be the distance of closest approach then by the conservation of energy.

Initial kinetic energy of incoming α-particle K
= Final electric potential energy U of the system 1
As K=1/4πε0x(2e)(Ze)/d
∴d= 1/4πε0 .2Ze2/K ..(i)
Here,
4πε01=9×109Nm2C−2
Z=79,e=1.6×10−19C.
K=7.7MeV
=7.7×106×1.6×10−9J
=1.2×10−12J
Substituting these values in (i) and solving,we get
d=3×10−14m 1
−15
m=30fm(∵1fm=10 m)

______________________________END_______________________________________________

14
 (SET 2 )

KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, AGRA REGION

FIRST PRE BOARD EXAMINATION 2024-25
CLASS : XII
SUBJECT: PHYSICS (THEORY)
Maximum Marks: 70 Time Allowed: 3 hours.

General Instructions:

(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.

(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning
based of 1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C
contains seven questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study based
questions of four marks each and Section E contains three long answer questions of five
marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one
question in Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D
and all three questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such
questions.
(6) Use of calculator is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
i. c = 3 x 108 m/s
ii. me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
-27
iii. mp= 1.7x10 kg
iv. e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
v. μ0 = 4π x 10-7 TmA−1
vi. h = 6.63 x10-34Js
vii. ε0 = 8.854 x10-12 C2N−1m−2
viii. Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 1023 per gram mole

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/1
 SECTION A
1 Figure here shows electric field lines in which an electric dipole p is 1
placed as shown. Which of the following statements is correct?
(a) The dipole will not experience any force.
(b) The dipole will experience a force towards right.
(c) The dipole will experience a force towards left.
(d) The dipole will experience a force upwards.

2 A small metallic ball having charge q is placed inside an insulated box. 1

The
Insulated box is then placed inside a metallic box. The net charge enclosed
inside the metallic box is:
(a)Zero
(b) q
(c)–q
(d) 2q
3 Two wires A and B of the same material, having radii in the ratio 1:2 and 1
carrying currents in the ratio 4:1.The ratio of drift velocity of electrons in
A & B is
(a) 16:1
(b) 1:16
(c) 1:4
(d) 4:1
4 Two long conductors separated by a distance d carry currents I1 and I2 in 1
the same direction. They exert a force F on each other. Now the current in
one of them is increased to two times and its direction is reversed. The
distance is also increased to 3d. The new value of the force between them
is
KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/2
 (a) -2F
(b) F/3
(c) -2F/3
(d) -F/3
5 A short bar magnet free to rotate on horizontal plane has a magnetic 1
moment of 0.48 J/T. Magnetic field produced by the magnet at a distance
of 10 cm from the centre of the magnet on the equatorial lines (normal
bisector) of the magnet has
a direction and magnitude of
(a) 0.43 x10-4 T along N-S direction
(b) 0.38 x10-4 T along N-S direction
(c) 0.55 x10-4 T along N-S direction
(d) 0.48 x10-4 T along N-S direction
6 In the given figure current from A to B in the straight wire is decreasing. 1
The direction of induced current in the loop is A
(a) clockwise
(b) anticlockwise
(c) changing
(d) nothing can be said
7 The correct option, if speeds of gamma rays, X-rays and microwave are 1
Vg, Vx and Vm respectively in space will be.
(a) Vg > Vx > Vm
(b) Vg <Vx <Vm
(c) Vg >Vx >Vm
(d) Vg = Vx = Vm
8 For the same value of angle of incidence, the angles of refraction in three 1
media A, B and C are 15°, 25° and 35° respectively. In which medium
would the velocity of light be minimum?
(a) A (b) B (c) C (d) Same in all media.

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/3
9 If the 8th bright fringe of light of wavelength λ1 coincides with the 9th 1
bright fringe of light of the wavelength λ2 in young‘s double experiment,
then the possible wavelengths of visible light are
(a).400nm and 450nm
(b).425nm and 400nm
(c).400nm and 425 nm
(d). 450nm and 400nm
10 Light of frequency 1.9 times the threshold frequency is incident on a 1
photosensitive material. If the frequency is halved and intensity is doubled,
the photocurrent becomes
(a) doubled
(b) quadrupled
(c ) halved
(d) zero
11 A nucleus of mass number 189 splits into two nuclei having mass no125 1
and 64.the ratio of radius of daughter nuclei respective is
(a) 25:16 (b) 1:1 (c) 4:5 (d) 5:4
12 A concave mirror of focal length 20 cm is cut into two parts from the 1
middle and the two parts are moved perpendicularly by a distance 1 mm
from the previous principal axis AB. The distance between the images
formed by the two pars is

(a) 2 mm (b) 6 mm (c) 3 mm (d) 4 mm

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/4
 ASSERTION REASON QUESTIONS
Two statements are given – one labeled Assertion (A) and other labeled as
Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes
(A),(B),(C),(D) as given below.
(A). Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(B). Both A and R are true and R is not the correct explanation of A
(C). A is true but R is false
(D). A is false and R is also false
13 Assertion(A) : 1
Figure shows a horizontal solenoid connected to a battery and a switch. A
copper ring is placed on a smooth surface, the axis of the ring being
horizontal. As the switch is closed, the ring will move away from the
solenoid.

Reason(R) : Induced emf in the ring, e= - dΦ/dt

14 Assertion (A): The maximum intensity in interference pattern is four 1

times the intensity due to each slit.
Reason (R): Intensity is directly proportional to square of amplitude
15 Assertion(A): The diffusion current in a p-n junction is from the p-side to 1
the n-side.
Reason(R): The diffusion current in a p-n junction is greater than the drift
current when the junction is in forward biased.
16 Assertion(A): Increasing the charge on the plates of a capacitor means 1
increasing the capacitance.
Reason(R): Capacitance is directly proportional to charge.

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/5
 SECTION B
17 An a.c signal is fed into two circuits X and Y and the corresponding output 2
in the two cases have the wave fronts shown in fig given below .Name the
circuit X and Y .Also draw either X or Y detailed circuit diagram.

18 The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. What are the 2
kinetic and potential energies of the electron in this state?
19 Calculate the speed of light in a medium whose critical angle is 450. Does 2
critical angle for a given pair of media depend on the wavelength of
incident light? Give reason.
Or
Find the intensity at a point on the screen in Young‘s double slit
experiment where the interfering waves of equal intensity 𝐼 each have a
path difference of 𝜆 ⁄3
20 A galvanometer of resistance 120 ohm gives full scale deflection for a 2
current of 5mA. How can it be converted into an ammeter of range 0 to
5A? Also determine the net resistance of the ammeter.
21 A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across an external 2
resistor R. write the relation between E and r . Plot the graph showing the
variation of Potential difference V across R, versus resistance R.
SECTION C
22 Using Kirchhoff’s rules determine the value of unknown resistance R in 3
the circuit so that no current flows through 4 Ω resistances. Also find the
potential difference between A and D.

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/6
23 A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a potential V by a 3
battery. Without disconnecting the battery, the distance between the plates
is tripled and dielectric medium of K = 10 is introduced between plates of
capacitor. Explain giving reason how will the following be affected?
(i) Capacitance of capacitor
(ii) Charge on capacitor
(iii) Energy density of capacitor
24 A device ‘X’ is connected to an ac source. The variation of voltage, 3
current and power in one complete cycle is shown in the figure

(i) Identify the device X.

(ii) Which of the curves A, B and C represent the voltage, current and the
power consumed in the circuit? Justify the answer.
(iii) How does its impedance vary with frequency of the AC source? Show
graphically.
OR
(a)The figure shows a series LCR circuit with L = 5.0 H, C = 80 μF, R =
40 Ω connected to a variable frequency 240 V source. Calculate
(i) The angular frequency of the source which drives the circuit at
resonance.
(ii) The current at the resonating frequency.
(iii) The rms potential drop across the capacitor at resonance.

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/7
25 Name the following parts of the electromagnetic spectrums. 3
a. Used in radar systems for aircraft navigation.
b. Used to treat muscular strain.
c. Used in hospitals for diagnosing diseases.
Briefly describe how these waves can be produced.
26 (a) A capacitor is connected in series to an ammeter across a d.c. source. 3
Why does the ammeter show a momentary deflection during the charging
of the capacitor? What would be the deflection when it is fully charged?
(b) How is the generalized form of Ampere’s circuital law obtained to
include the term due to displacement current?
27 Yellow light (λ = 6000Å) illuminates a single slit of width 1 x 10-4 m. 3
Calculate
(i) the distance between the two dark lines on either side of the central
maximum, when the diffraction pattern is viewed on a screen kept 1.5 m
away from the slit;
(ii) the angular spread of the first diffraction minimum.
28 Using the graph shown in the figure for stopping potential v/s the incident 3
frequency of photons, calculate Planck’s constant.

SECTION D ( CASE BASED QUESTION)

29 When electric dipole is placed in uniform electric field, its two charges 4
experience equal and opposite forces, which cancel each other and hence
net force on electric dipole in uniform electric field is zero. However these

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/8
forces are not collinear, so they give rise to some torque on the dipole.
Since net force on electric dipole in uniform electric field is zero, so no
work is done in moving the electric dipole in uniform electric field.
However, some work is done in rotating the dipole against the torque
acting on it.

1. The dipole moment of a dipole in a uniform external field E is P. Then

the torque τ acting on the dipole is
(a) τ = P x E (b) τ = P. E(c) τ = 2(P +E) (d) τ = (P + E)
2. An electric dipole consists of two opposite charges, each of magnitude
1.0μC separated by a distance of 2.0 cm. The dipole is placed in an
external field of 105 NC-1 . The maximum torque on the dipole is
(a) 0.2 × 10-3 Nm (b) 1×10-3 Nm (c) 2 × 10-3 Nm (d) 4 × 10-3 Nm
3. Torque on a dipole in a uniform electric field is minimum when θ is
equal to
(a) 0° (b) 90° (c) 180° (d) Both (a) and (c)
4. When an electric dipole is held at an angle in a uniform electric field,
the net force F and torque τ on the dipole are
(a) F= 0, τ = 0 (b) F≠0, τ≠0 (c) F=0, τ ≠ 0 (d) F≠0, τ=0
OR
4. An electric dipole of moment p is placed in an electric field of intensity
E. The dipole acquires a position such that the axis of the dipole makes an
angle with the direction of the field. Assuming that potential energy of the
dipole to be zero when θ = 90°, the torque and the potential energy of the

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/9
 dipole will respectively be
(a) pEsinθ, - pEcosθ
(b) pEsinθ, -2pEcosθ
(c) pEsinθ, 2pEcosθ
(d) pEcosθ, -pEsinθ
30 Motions of the charge carriers – if you burst a helium -filled balloon, 4
helium atoms will diffuse (spread) outward into the surrounding air. This
happens because these are very few helium atoms in normal air. There is a
helium density gradient at the balloon- air interface (the number density of
helium atoms varies across the interface), the helium atoms move so as to
reduce the gradient.
In same way, electrons on the n-side are close to the junction plane tend to
diffuse across it and into the p-side, where there are very few free
electrons. Similarly, holes on the p-side are close to the junction plane tend
to diffuse across that plane and into the n-side, where there are very few
holes. The motions of both the electrons and the holes contribute to
diffusion current (Idiff.).

1.Silicon is doped with which of the following to obtain p-type

semiconductor?
a. Phosphorus
b. Gallium
c. Germanium
d. Bismuth
2. A semiconductor has an electron concentration of 6 x 1022 per m3 and
hole concentration of 8.5 x 109 per m3. Then it is

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/10
 a. n-type conductor
b. p-type conductor
c. intrinsic conductor
d. conductor
3.In a p-n-junction diode
a. The current in the reverse biased condition is generally very
small~μA.
b. The current in the reverse biased condition is small but the forward
biased current is independent of the bias voltage.
c. The reverse biased current is strongly dependent on the applied
voltage.
d. The forward biased current is very small in comparison to reverse
biased current.
4.In the middle of the depletion layer of a reverse biased p-n junction, the
a. Electric field is zero
b. Potential is maximum
c. Electric field is maximum
d. Potential is zero
OR
The dominant mechanism for the motion of charge carriers in forward and
reverse biased silicon junctions are
a. Drift in forward bias, diffusion in reverse bias
b. Diffusion in forward bias, drift in reverse bias
c. Diffusion in both forward and reverse bias
d. Drift in both forward and reverse bias.
SECTION E
31 (a) Sketch the magnetic field for a circular current loop and indicate the 5
direction of the field.
(b) State using a suitable diagram, the working principle of a moving coil
galvanometer. What is the function of a radial magnetic field and the soft

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/11
 iron core used in it?
(c) For converting a galvanometer into an ammeter, a shunt resistance of
small value is used in parallel, whereas in the case of a voltmeter a
resistance of large value is used in series. Explain why
OR
(a) State Biot-Savart law. Deduce the expression for the magnetic field due
to a circular current carrying loop at a point lying on its axis.
(b) Derive the expression for the torque on a rectangular current carrying
loop suspended in a uniform magnetic field.
(c) A proton and a deuteron having equal momentum enter in a region of
uniform magnetic field at right angle to the direction of the field. Depict
their trajectories in the field.
32 (a)The relation, between the angle of incidence (i) and the corresponding, 5
angle of deviation (δ), for a certain optical device, is represented by the
graph shown in the figure. Identify this device. Draw a ray diagram for this
device and use it for obtaining an expression for the refractive index of the
material of this device in terms of an angle characteristic of the device and
the angle, marked an m, in the graph.

(b) You are given three lenses L1 L2 and L3 each of focal length 15 cm. An
object is kept at 20 cm in front of L1, as shown. The final real image is
formed at the focus ‘I’ of L3. Find the separations between L1, L2 and L3.

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/12
 OR

(a) Define power of a lens. Write its S.I units. Two thin convex lenses of
focal lengths f1 and f2 are placed in contact coaxially. Derive the
expression for the effective focal length of the combination.
(b) A small telescope has an objective lens of focal length 140 cm and an
eye-piece of focal length 5.0 cm. Find the magnifying power of the
telescope for viewing distant objects when
(i) the telescope is in normal adjustment,
(ii) the final image is formed at the least distance of distinct vision.
33 (a) Draw a schematic arrangement of Geiger- Marsden experiment 5
showing the scattering of α-particles by a thin foil of gold. Why is it that
most of the α -particles go right through the foil and only a small fraction
gets scattered at large angles?
Draw the trajectory of the α -particle in the coulomb field of a nucleus.
What is the significance of impact parameter and what information can be
obtained regarding the size of the nucleus?
(b) Estimate the distance of closest approach to the nucleus (Z = 80) if a
7.7 MeV α-particle before it comes momentarily to rest and reverses its
direction
OR
(a) Draw the plot of binding energy per nucleon (BE/A) as a function of
mass number A. Write two important conclusions that can be drawn
regarding the nature of nuclear force.
(b) Use this graph to explain the release of energy in both the processes of
nuclear fusion and fission
(c) Name the strongest force in nature .write two characteristic of this
force .
-------------------------***********------------------------

KVSAGRA/PHY/SET2/13
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN- AGRA REGION
MARKING SCHEME OF FIRST PREBOARD : 2024-2025
Class: XII SUBJECT: PHYSICS
SET-2
Q NO MARKS
SECTION A
1 (c) The dipole will experience a force towards left. 1

2 (a) zero 1
3 (a) 1
4 (c) 1
5 (d) Using expression 1

0.48 G along N-S direction

6 (b) Induced current is anticlockwise in the loop. 1
7 (d) All electromagnetic waves travel with the speed of light in space. 1
8 (a) 1
9 (d) 8 λ1D/d=9 λ2D/d 8 λ1=9 λ2 1
10 (d) No photoelectric emission happens when the frequency of incoming 1
radiation falls below a specific threshold
11 (d) 1
12 (a) 2 mm 1
Solution
The correct option is A 2 mm

Let P1Q1= principal axis for the mirror M1,

Page 1 of 15
 P2Q2= principal axis for the mirror M2 (I1= Image formed
by M1,I2= Image formed by M2)
Height of object and image are measured with respect to principal axis
of respective mirror.
Applying sign convention, we have,
f=−20 cm,u=−10 cm
and by Mirror formula
1−10+1v=1−20⟹v=20 cm
Magnification of image is
m=−vu=−20−10=2=hiho⟹hi=2 cm
(+ve magnification means image and object are on the same side with
respect to principal axis.)

hI1=2 cm below the principal axis P1Q1

hI2=2 cm below the principal axis P2Q2
⟹I1I2=2 cm
13 (a) 1
14 (b) 1
15 1
(b)
16 (d) 1
SECTION B
17 X- half wave rectifier. 1
Y-full wave rectifier.

18 Total energy. 1
E = -13.6 eV 1
K.E. = -E = 13.6 eV

Page 2 of 15
 P.E.= -2 K.E. = -27.2 eV
19 Critical angle(C) = 450 .
Speed in medium (v)=?

0.5+0.5
Yes, correct reason
Or
1

20 S= 𝐼𝐺 /(𝐼−𝐼 ) = 0.12Ω 1
Net resistance 1
21 V=E- ir 1

SECTION C
22. Applying Kirchhoff's loop rule for loop 1
ABEFA,
–9 + 6 + 4 × 0 + 2I = 0 1
or, I = 1.5 A
For loop BCDEB, 3 + IR + 4 × 0 – 6 = 0 1
or, R = 2Ω
To find Potential difference between A and D, using KVL through open
loop ABCD,
9 – 3 – IR = VA - VD = 3V
Page 3 of 15
23. Correct Explanation 1
Or 1
C = ε0A/d 1
(i) when battery is not disconnected, then V = constant, d’ = 3d & K = 10
C’ = K ε0A/d’ = 10 ε0A/3d = 10 C/3
(ii) Charge Q’ = C’V = 10/3CV = 10Q/3
(iii) Energy density, u’ = 10 u/9
24.
1

1
1

OR

1
1
25. a. Microwaves are used in radar systems that are used in aircraft navigation. 1
These rays can be produced by making use of special vacuum tubes, such
as Klystrons, magnetrons and Gunn diodes etc.

Page 4 of 15
 b. Infrared waves are used in the treatment of muscular strain. These rays
can be produced by hot bodies and molecules.
c. X rays are used as a very significant diagnostic tool in medicine. These
rays are produced when high energy electrons hit any metal of a greater 1
atomic number.
1
26. (a) The momentary deflection is due to the transient current flowing 1
through the circuit when the capacitor is getting charged.
The deflection would be zero when the capacitor gets fully charged.

(b)
Maxwell’s displacement current : According to Ampere’s circuital law, the
magnetic field B is related to steady current I as
1

Maxwell showed that this relation is logically in-consistent. He accounted

this inconsistency as follows :
Ampere’s circuital law for loop C1 gives

which is logically inconsistent. So, Maxwell gave idea of displacement

current.

Thus displacement current is that current which comes into play in the
region in which the electric field and hence the electric flux is changing

Page 5 of 15
 with time. 1

It is now called Ampere-Maxwell law. This is the generalization of

Ampere’s circuital law
27. (i) Distance between two dark lines, on either 1

(ii) Angular spread of the first diffraction minimum (on either side) 1

28. 1

SECTION D
29 1.(a) τ = P x E ; 1
2.(c) 2 × 10-3 Nm (As maximum torque is given by, τmax = PE , 1

3.(a) 00; Torque = PE sinθ and sinθ has minimum value equal to 0, for θ = 1
0o 1
Page 6 of 15
 4. (c) F = 0, τ ≠ 0 ; As from figure, it is clear that under the given condition
two equal, opposite and parallel forces begin to act on the dipole forming a
couple and due to this couple a torque is generated on the dipole. But at the
same time we notice that the two equal and opposite forces also act on the
dipole making thereby net force equal to zero.

OR
4. (a) pEsinθ, - pEcosθ ; Torque = pEsinθ and potential energy of the 1

dipole = - P . E = -pEcosθ
30. 1. (b) 1
2.(a) 1
3. (a) 1
4. (a) 1
OR
4. (b) 1
SECTION E
31. (a) 1

(b) Moving coil galvanometer. It is a device used for the detection and
measurement of small electric current.
Principle. The working is based on the fact that a current carrying coil
Page 7 of 15
suspended in a magnetic field experiences a torque.
Construction. It consists of a coil having a large number of turns of
insulated copper wire wound on a metallic frame. The coil is suspended by
means of a phosphor-bronze strip and is surrounded by a magnet N S. A
hair spring is attached to lower end of the coil. The other end of the spring
is attached to the scale through a pointer.

Working. When current is passed, say along ABCD, the couple acts on it.
Since the plane remains always parallel to the magnetic field in all
positions of the coil (radial field), the force on the vertical arms always
remains perpendicular to the place of the coil.

Let, I be the current flowing through coil,

B be magnetic field supposed to be uniform and always parallel to the coil,
A be area of the coil
Deflecting torque acting on the coil is,
1
τ = nI BA sin 900

Due to deflecting torque, the coil rotates and suspension wire gets twisted.
A restoring torque is set up in the suspension fibre. If φ is angle through
which the coil rotates and k is the restoring torque per unit angular twist,
then restoring torque, τ = kϕ
In equilibrium,

Page 8 of 15
Deflecting torque = Restoring torque

This provide a linear scale for the galvanometer.

(b) Function of a radial magnetic field : Radial magnetic field being normal
in all directions is formed to get maximum torque.
½+1/2
Function of Soft iron core, which not only makes the field radial but also
increases the strength of the magnetic field.
(c) One uses a shunt resistance in parallel with the galvanometer, so that
most of the current passes through the shunt. In the case of a voltmeter, a
resistance of large value is used in series because it must draw a very small
1
current, otherwise the voltage measurement will disturb the original set up
by an amount which is very large.

OR

Page 9 of 15
(

The components perpendicular to the axis of the loop will be equal and
opposite to component along the axis of the loop and will cancel out. Their
axial components will be in the same direction, i.e., along CP and get added
up.
∴ Total magnetic field at point P in the direction CP is 1

1+1

Page 10 of 15
 1

The direction of this field is along the axis, in the sense given by the right
hand (thumb) rule.
(b ) correct derivation
(c) Since the momentum and the charge on both the proton and deutron are
the same, the particle will follow a circular path with radius 1:1.

32 (a)The device identified is a ‘PRISM’. 1

Correct deviation
1
(b) Let f1 f2 and f3 be the focal length of three lenses.
For lens L1 : u = 20 cm

It shows that lens infinite.

Hence for lens L1, image is formed at a distance of 15 cm from L2
∴ the focus of L2 i.e. u2 = 15 cm

Page 11 of 15
Now, to calculate the distance between L1 and L2, 1
u1 + H2 = 60 + 15 = 75 cm
Distance between L2 and L3 = v2 + v3 = ∞ or can be any value.

OR

(a)Power of a lens is defined as the ability to converge a beam of light

facing on the lens

Its S.I. unit is dioptre (D)

Let C1, C2 be the optical centres of two thin convex lenses L1 and L2 held
co-axially in contact with each other in air.

Suppose f1 and f2 are their respective focal lengths Let a point object O be
placed on the common principal axis at a distance OC1 = u
The lens L1 alone would form its image at I’ where C1I’ = v’
From the lens formula for L1,

I’ would serve as a virtual object for lens L2, which forms a final image I at
a distance of
C1 I = v
As the lenses are thin, therefore, for the lens L2,
u = i2I’ = C1I’ = v’
From the lens formula for L2,
1

Adding equations (i) and {ii), we get

Page 12 of 15
 Let the two lenses be replaced by a single lens of focal length f which
forms image I at distance v, of an object at distance u from the lens

(b) (i) For normal adjustment :

1
(ii) When the final image is formed at the least distance of distinct vision,

33 1

(ii) For most of the α-particles, impact parameter is large, hence they suffer
very small repulsion due to nucleus and go right through the foil.
(iii) Trajectory of α-particles

1
1

Page 13 of 15
It gives an estimate of the size of nucleus, that it relatively very very small
1
as compared to the size of atom.

(b) K.E. of the a-particle = Potential energy possessed by beam at distance

of closest approach.

OR

Conclusions :
(i) The force is attractive and sufficiently strong to produce a binding 1
energy of a few MeV per nucleon.

Page 14 of 15
 1/2 +1/2

(b) (i) When we move from heavy nuclei region to middle region, we find
that there will be a gain in overall binding energy and hence release of
energy. This indicates that energy can be released when a heavy nucleus 1
breaks into two roughly equal fragments/nuclear fission.
(ii) Similarly, when we move from lighter nuclei to heavier nuclei, we find 1/2+1/2
that there will be gain in overall binding energy and hence release of
energy. This indicates that energy can be released when two lighter
nuclei fuse together to form heavy nucleus/nuclear fusion.

(c) Nuclear force

Any two characteristic properties of nuclear forces

Page 15 of 15
 SET: 3

KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN

AGRA REGION
FIRST PRE-BOARD EXAM 2024-25
CLASS: XII
SUBJECT- PHYSICS(THEORY)

Max. Marks : 70 Time: 3 hours

General Instructions:

(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.

(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based of
1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains seven
questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study based questions of four
marks each and Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one question
in Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all three
questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
(i). c = 3 x 108 m/s
(ii). me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
(iii). e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
(iv). µ0 = 4π x 10-7 Tm𝑨 −𝟏
(v). h = 6.63 x10-34 Js
(vi). ε0 = 8.854 x10-12 𝑪 𝟐𝑵−𝟏𝒎−𝟐
(vii). Avogadro’s number = 6.023 x 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟑 per gram mole

SECTION : A

Q.NO. MAR
KS
1. Dielectric constant for a metal is 1
(a) zero
(b) infinite
(c) 1
(d) 10
2. Kirchhoff’s law of junctions is also called the law of conservation of 1
(a) Energy
(b) Charge
(c) Momentum
(d) Angular momentum

3. Figure shows the electric lines of force emerging from a charged 1

body. If the electric field atA and B are EA and EB respectively and
if the displacement between A and B is r then

KVS/AGRA/PHY/SET1/1
 (a) EA > EB (b) EA < EB (c) EA = EB / r (d) EA = EB /r²

4. 1
An electron is released from rest in a region of uniform electric and
magnetic field acting parallel to each other, the electron will
(a) move in a straight-line (b) move in a circle
(c) remains stationary (d) move in a helical path

5. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is -13.6eV. What is 1

the potential energy of electron in this state?
(a) 0 eV (b) -27.2 eV (c) 1 eV (d) 2 eV

6. A biconvex lens of glass having refractive index 1.47 is immersed 1

in a liquid. It becomes invisible and behaves as a plane glass plate.

The refractive index of the liquid is
(a) 1.47 (b) 1.62 (c) 1.33 (d) 1.51
7. A double slit interference experiment is carried out in air and the 1
entire arrangement is dipped in water. The fringe width
(a) Increase (b) Decrease
(c) remains unchanged (d) fringe pattern disappear
8 What will be the de-Broglie wavelength of an electron 1
accelerated from rest through a potentialdifference of 100
volts?
(a) 12.27 Å (b) 1.227 Å (c) 0.1227 Å (d)None of these

9 The electromagnetic wave used in RADAR navigation is- 1

(a) Gamma Ray
(b) Micro wave
(c) Radio wave
(d) X - Ray

10 An equiconvex lens of focal length 15 cm is cut into two halves as 1

shown in figure. Find the focal length of each part?

(a) -30cm (b) -20cm (c) 30cm (d) -15cm

11 The direction of the magnetic field at the center of a current-carrying 1
circular loop is:
(a) Along the axis of the loop

KVS/AGRA/PHY/SET1/2
 (b) Parallel to the plane of the loop
(c) Radially inward
(d)Tangential to the loop
12 1
In an LCR circuit the voltage across L, C and R is 10V each. If
the inductor is short circuited,the effective voltage becomes

(a) 10 V (b) 10 √ (c) 20 √ V (d) 20 V

Directions: Each of these questions contain two statements, Assertion 1

and Reason. Each of these questions also has four alternative choices,
only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select one of the
codes (A), (B), (C) and (D) given below.
(A) Assertion is correct, reason is correct; reason is a correct
explanation for assertion.
(B) Assertion is correct, reason is correct; reason is not a correct
explanation for assertion
(C) Assertion is correct, reason is incorrect
(D) Assertion is incorrect, reason is incorrect

Assertion: In a non -uniform electric field, a dipole will

13 have translatory as well as rotatory motion
Reason: In non-uniform electric field a dipole experience a force as
well as torque.

14 Assertion: At a fixed temperature, silicon will have a minimum

conductivity when smaller acceptor doping.
Reason: The conductivity of an intrinsic semiconductor is slightly higher
than that of lightly doped p-type.
15 1
Assertion : In astronomical telescope, the objective
lens is of larger aperture.
Reason: Larger is aperture, smaller is the magnifying power.

16 Assertion : Average power in an A.C circuit having L only is Zero. 1

Reason : Power factor of A.C circuit having L only is zero.

SECTION: B

17 Define magnetic flux. Write its SI unit. Scalar or vector 2

18 In half-wave rectification, what is the output frequency if the input 2

frequency is 50 Hz? What is the output frequency of a full-wave
rectifier for the same input frequency?

19 Show that the radius of the orbit in hydrogen atom varies as n2, where 2
n is the principal quantum number of the atom.
OR
Two nuclei have mass numbers in the ratio 1: 2. What is the ratio of
their nuclear densities?

20 The potential difference applied across a given conductor is 2

doubled. How will this affect -
KVS/AGRA/PHY/SET1/3
 (i) the mobility of electrons and (ii) the current density in the
conductor? Justify your answers.
21 A biconvex lens made of a transparent material of refractive index 2
1.25 is immersed in water of refractive index 1.33. Will the lens
behave as a converging or a diverging lens? Give reasons.

OR

The power of a thin lens is +5 D. When it is immersed in a liquid, it

behaves like a concave lens of focal length 100 cm. Calculate the
refractive index of the liquid. Given refractive index of glass = 1.5.

SECTION C
22 The given graph how is the variation of photo-electric current (I) with the 3
applied voltage (V) for two different materials and for two different
intensities of the incident radiations. Identify and explain using Einstein’s
photo electric equation for the pair of curves that correspond to
(i) different materials but same intensity of
incident radiation,
(ii) different intensities but same materials.

23 Arrange the following E.M. Wave, in increasing order of frequency 3

and among these waves, which wave have greatest penetration power
and ionization power?
(a) X- ray (b) Gamma ray (c) Radio wave (d) visible light

24 The ratio of intensities of maxima and minima in an interference 3

pattern is found to be 25:9. Calculate ratio of light intensities of the
sources producing the pattern.
25 State Ampere’s circuital law. Derive an expression for magnetic 3
intensity due to a current carrying straight wire of infinite length.
26 Explain the term ‘drift velocity’ of electrons in a conductor. Hence 3
obtain the expression for the current through a conductor in terms
of ‘drift velocity.
27 Using Gauss’s law, prove that the electric field at a point due to a 3
uniformly charged infinite plane sheet is independent of the
distance from it. How is the field directed if
(i) the sheet is positively charged,
(ii) negatively charged?
28 3
A series LCR circuit with R  20  , L = 2H and C  50 F is
connected to a 200 V A.C. source of variable frequency-
(i) What is the amplitude of the current and its rms value.
(ii) what is the average power transferred to the circuit in one
complete cycle at resonance
(iii) Calculate the potential drop across the capacitor?
OR

KVS/AGRA/PHY/SET1/4
 In an ideal transformer, the number of turns of primary and
secondary is 1000 and 2000 respectively.
(i) If maximum voltage in primary is 120V, what is the
maximum voltage in secondary?
(ii) if the current in primary coil is 5 Amp calculate current
in secondary coil?

SECTION: D

29 When electric dipole is placed in uniform electric field, its two

charges experience equal and opposite forces, which cancel each 1+1+1+1
other and hence net force on electric dipole in uniform electric field is
zero. However, these forces are not collinear, so they give rise to
some torque on the dipole. Since net force on electric dipole in
uniform electric field is zero, so no work is done in moving the
electric dipole in uniform electric field. However, some work is done
in rotating the dipole against the torque acting on it.

(i) The dipole moment of a dipole in a uniform external field Ē is p.

Then the torque τ acting on the dipole is
(a) τ = p x E
(b) τ = p. Ē
(c) τ = 2(p + Ē)
(d) τ = (P + E)
(ii) An electric dipole consists of two opposite charges, each of
magnitude 1.0 μC separated by a distance of 2.0 cm. The dipole is
placed in an external field of 105 NC-1. The maximum torque on
the dipole is
(a) 0.2 x 10-3 Nm
(b) 1x 10-3 Nm
(c) 2 x 10-3 Nm
(d) 4x 10-3 Nm
(iii) Torque on a dipole in uniform electric field is minimum
when θ is equal to
(a) 0°
(b) 90°
(c) 180°
(d) Both (a) and (c)
(iv) When an electric dipole is held at an angle in a uniform
electric field, the net force F and torque τ on the dipole are
(a) F= 0, τ = 0
(b) F≠0, τ≠0
(c) F=0, τ ≠ 0
(d) F≠0, τ=0
OR

KVS/AGRA/PHY/SET1/5
 An electric dipole of moment p is placed in an electric field of
intensity E. The dipole acquires a position such that the axis of
the dipole makes an angle with the direction of the field.
Assuming that potential energy of the dipole to be zero when θ =
90°, the torque and the potential energy of the dipole will
respectively be
(a) pEsinθ, -pEcosθ
(b) pEsinθ, -2pEcosθ
(c) pEsinθ, 2pEcosθ
(d) pEcosθ, – pEsinθ

30 Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that 1+1+2
follow.
For most mobile devices, the voltage to recharge the battery is
typically 5 volts of direct current. In India, the current supplied to
our homes is alternating current at 220V and at a frequency of 50 Hz.
Fatima designed a simplified version of a mobile phone charger. She
made a circuit using a centre tap transformer and two similar silicon
diodes D1 and D2 as shown below. Study the diagram below and
answer the questions that follow.

1. What is the maximum efficiency of a full wave rectifier?

(A) 50% (B) 60% (C) 80% (D) 100%
2. What is the output frequency of a full wave rectifier connected to
a 50 Hz AC supply?
(A) 50 Hz (B) 100 Hz (C) 150 Hz (D) 200 Hz
3. In a full wave rectifier, what is the function of the transformer?
(A) To increase voltage (B) To decrease voltage
(C) To provide isolation (D) To filter output
4. What is the main advantage of a full wave rectifier?
(A) High voltage regulation (B) High efficiency
(C) Low ripple factor (D) All of the above
OR
In a full wave rectifier, what is the purpose of the load resistor?
(A) To increase output voltage
(B) To decrease output current
(C) To regulate output voltage
(D) To provide a path for current flow

KVS/AGRA/PHY/SET1/6
 SECTION :E

31 Draw a labelled diagram of a moving coil galvanometer and give its 2+1+2
principle. Prove that in a radial magnetic field the deflection of the coil
is directly proportional to the current flowing in the coil.
OR
(a) Derive an expression for the force between two parallel current
carrying conductors and hence define one ampere. 3+1+1
(b) Answer the following:
(i) What is the nature of force if current flowing in two wires is in same
direction?
(i) What is the nature of force if current flowing in two wires is in
opposite direction?
32 Draw a curve between mass number and binding energy per nucleon. 2+2+1
Give two salient features of the curve. Hence define binding energy.
OR
What is nuclear force? Draw a plot of potential energy of a pair of
nucleons as a function of their separation. Write two important 1+2+2
conclusions which you can draw regarding the nature of nuclear force.

33 What are the conditions for sustained interference? What is the effect on 2+1+1+1
the interference pattern observed in a Young’s double slit experiment in
the following cases:
(a) Screen is moved away from the plane of the slits,
(b) Separation between the slits is increased, and
(c) Widths of the slits are doubled, Give reasons for your answer.
OR
What is diffraction of light? Discuss single slit experiment for
diffraction. Draw the graph to show the relative intensity distribution for
a single slit diffraction pattern. Obtain the expression for the width of 1+2+2
central maxima.

-------------------**************----------------------

KVS/AGRA/PHY/SET1/7
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN
AGRA REGION
PRE – BOARD EXAM 2024-25
CLASS : 12th PHYSICS
SET: 3
MARKING SCHEME

Q.NO. MARKS
1 (b) infinite 1
2 b) Charge 1
3 (a) EA > EB 1
4 a) move in a straight-line 1
5
(b) -27.2 eV 1
6 (a) 1.47 1
7 (b) Decrease 1
8 b) 1.227 Å 1
9 (b) Micro wave 1
10 (c) 30cm 1
11 (a) Along the axis of the loop 1
12 (a) 10 V 1
13 (i) Assertion is correct, reason is correct reason is the correct 1
explanation of Assertion.
14 (i) Assertion is correct, reason is correct reason is the correct 1
explanation of Assertion.
15 (iii) Assertion is correct, reason is incorrect 1
16 (i) Assertion is correct, reason is correct; reason is a correct 1
explanation for assertion.
17 It is defined as the number of field lines crossing the surface 1+1
normally.
∅=∆𝑆. ⃑⃑ =B (∆𝑆) 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃; It is a scalar; SI unit: Tesla m2 or
Weber
18 1
For a half-wave rectifier, the output frequency is equal to the 1
input frequency. In this case, the input frequency of the half-
wave rectifier is 50 Hz.
On the other hand, the output frequency for a full-wave rectifier is
twice the input frequency. Therefore, the output frequency is 2 × 50
= 100 Hz.
19 PROVE 2

OR
1+1
Expression for nuclear density

1:1
20 (i) Mobility ∝ 1/Potential difference 2
So, if potential difference is doubled, mobility will be halved.
(ii) Current density ∝ Potential difference
So, if potential difference is doubled, current density will also be double.

Page 1 of 4
21 refractive index of lens 1.25 is less than refractive index of water 2
1.33.so the nature of lens will change, the lens will behave like a
concave lens .

OR

Power of the lens = +5D

Focal length of the lens = f = , SO f= ∴ f = 20 cm

Using lens makers’ formula, =( )( )

 ( ) …………………….(1)

, =( )( ) => =( )( )

22 (i) (1,2) and (3,4) 1.5

(ii) (1,3) and (2,4) 1.5

23 (c) Radio wave < (d) visible light < (a)X ray <(b) Gamma ray 2
Greatest penetration power - Gamma ray 0.5+0.5
Greatest ionization power - Radio wave

24 1
Ans. Imax / Imin = 25/9 2
Imax / Imin = (a1+a2)2/(a1-a2)2= 25/9a1/ a2 = 1/4

I1/I2= a12/ a22 = (1/4)2 = 1/16

25 Statement +Derivation 1+2
26 Definition: Drift velocity is defined as the velocity with which free 1
electrons in a conductor get drifted ina direction opposite to the
direction of the applied field. Its unit is m/s.

Expression: The magnitude of electric field set up across the 2

conductor is givenby
E = V/l
Let n be the number of free electrons per unit volume of
the conductor.Then, total number of free electrons in
the conductor = n × Volume of the conductor

Page 2 of 4
 Hence, Q = (nAl)e
Time taken by the charge to cross the conductor length l is given by

27
Sol Consider a thin, infinite plane sheet of charge with uniform 1
surface charge density σ.We wish to calculate its electric field at a
point P at distance r from it 1

By symmetry, electric field E points outwards normal to the sheet.

Also, it must have same magnitude and opposite direction at two
points P and F equidistant from the sheet and on opposite sides. We
choose cylindrical Gaussian surface of cross-sectionalarea A and
length 2r with its axis perpendicular to the sheet. As the lines of force
are parallel to the curved surface of the cylinder, the flux through the
curved surface is zero. The flux through the plane-end faces of the
cylinder is:

28 (i) The RMS of the current is 10 A , Current amplitude = 14.14 A 0.5+0.5

(ii) the average power transferred to the circuit in one complete cycle at 1
resonance =2000 W 1
(iii)At resonance the potential drop across capacitor is zero.
OR
0.5+0.5

Page 3 of 4
 , 𝑜 1

, 1

29 Answers: (i) (a) (ii) (c) (iii) (d) (iv) (c) OR (a) 1+1+1+1

30 Answer:1 C) 80% 1
1
Answer: 2 B) 100 HZ
1
Answer3 : C) To provide isolation 1
Answer4: D) All of the above
OR 1
Answer4 : D) To provide a path for current flow
31 Levelled dig.+Prove 2+3
OR
derivation +Definition+ direction of force 3+1
+0.5+0.5
32 The total energy required to disintegrate the nucleus into its 2+2+1
constituent particles is called binding energy of the nucleus.

Salient features of the curve

(i) The intermediate nuclei have a large value of binding energy
pernucleon, so they are most stable. (For 30<A>63 )
(ii) The binding energy per nucleon has low value for both the light
and heavy nuclei. So, they are unstable nuclei.
OR
Definition of nuclear force. 1+ 2+2
Graph +2 conclusion
33 Conditions 2+3
(i)Increase + reasons (ii) decrease + reasons (iii) increase + reasons
OR 1+2+2
Definition +graph+ derivation for width of central maxima

Page 4 of 4
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN BHUBANESWAR REGION
FIRST PRE-BOARD EXAMINATION 2024-25
SUB-PHYSICS
CLASS – XII
SET 1
Maximum Marks: 70 Time Allowed: 3 hours
General Instructions
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based of 1
mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains seven
questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study-based questions of four marks
each and Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one question in
Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all three questions
in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants wherever necessary
e = 1.6 x 10-19 C c = 3 x 108 m/s me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
mp = 1.7 x10-27 kg h = 6.63 x10-34 J s ε0 = 8.854 x10-12 C2 N-1 m-2
1
 9  109 N m2 C –2 μo= 4 π x 10−7 T m A−1
4 0

[SECTION-A]
Q1. In the given figure, two positive charges q2 and q3 fixed along the y axis, exert a net electric
force in the + x direction on a charge q1 fixed along the x axis. If a positive charge Q is added at (x,
0), the force on q1

(A) shall increase along the positive x-axis.

(B) shall decrease along the positive x-axis.
(C) shall point along the negative x-axis.
(D) shall increase but the direction changes because of the intersection of Q with q2 and q3

Q2 Two uniformly charged spherical conductors A and B of radii 5 mm and 10 mm are separated
by a distance of 2 cm. If the spheres are connected by a conducting wire, then in equilibrium
condition, the ratio of the magnitude of electric fields at the surface of the spheres A and B will
be

1
 (A) 1:2 (B) 2:1 (C) 1:1 (D) 1:4
Q3 In a parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates, each plate has an area of 6 X 10-3
m2and the distance between the plates is 3 mm. The capacitance of the capacitor will be
(A) 16 pF (B) 18 pF (C) 20 pF (D) 0 pF
Q4 An electric current is passed through a circuit containing two wires of same material,
connected in parallel. If the lengths and radii of the wires are in the ratio of 3:2 and 2:3, then
the ratio of the current passing through the wires
(A) 2:3 (B) 3:2 (C) 8:27 (D) 27:8
Q5 Two wires of the same length are shaped into a square of side ‘a’ and a circle with radius ‘r’. If
they carry same current, the ratio of their magnetic moment is
(A) 2 :  (B)  : 2 (C)  :4 (D) 4 : 
Q6 In a series LCR circuit, the capacitance is changed from C to C/4. For the resonant frequency
to remain unchanged, the inductance should be changed from L to nL, where n is
1 1
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 4
Q7. Correct match of column I with column II is
C-1 ( waves ) C-II ( wavelength range )
(1) Infra-red P. > 0.1 m
(2) Radio Q. 700 nm to 400 nm
(3) Light R. 0.1 m to 1 mm
(4) Microwave S. 1mm to 700 nm

(A) 1-P, 2-R, 3-S,4-Q (B) 1-S, 2-P, 3-Q, 4-R

(C) 1-Q,2-P, 3-S, 4-R (D) 1-S, 2-R, 3-P, 4-Q
Q8. In the wave picture of light, the intensity I of light is related to the amplitude A of the wave as
1
(A) I  √𝐴 (B) I  A (C) I  A2 (D) I  𝐴2

Q9. The coherence of two light sources means that the light waves emitted have
(A) same frequency (B) same intensity
(C) constant phase difference (D) same velocity
Q10. A small air bubble in a glass sphere of radius 2 cm appears to be 1 cm from the surface when
looked at, along a diameter. If the refractive index of glass is 1.5, then the true position of the
air bubble will be
(A) -1.5 cm (B) -2.0 cm (C) 1.4 cm (D) -1.2 cm
Q11. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. The potential energy of an electron in
the second excited state is
(A) -3.02 eV (B) -1.70 eV (C) -0.85 eV (D) -1.51 eV
Q12. At equilibrium, in a p-n junction diode the net current is
(A) due to diffusion of majority charge carriers.
(B) due to drift of minority charge carriers.
(C) zero as diffusion and drift currents are equal and opposite.
(D) zero as no charge carriers cross the junction.

2
 For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and other
labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the options as
given below.
A. If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of Assertion.
B. If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of
Assertion.
C. If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
D. If both Assertion and Reason are false.
Q13. Assertion (A): To increase the range of an ammeter, a high resistance in series must be
connected to it.
Reason (R): The ammeter with increased range should have high resistance.
Q14. Assertion (A): de-Broglie waves are not electromagnetic waves.
Reason (R): Electromagnetic waves are associated with accelerated charge particles.
Q15. Assertion (A): Angular momentum of single electron in any orbit of hydrogen type atoms is
independent of the atomic number of the element
Reason (R): In ground state angular momentum is minimum.
Q16 Assertion (A) : Binding energy per nucleon is nearly constant for middle mass nuclei (30 < A
< 170).
Reason (R): Nuclear force is short ranged in nature.
[ SECTION – B]
Q17. Draw a schematic arrangement of the Geiger-Marsden experiment. What is impact
parameter? How it is related with angle of scattering of α-particles.
Q18. (I) In a Young’s double slit experiment, fringes are obtained on a screen placed a certain
distance away from the slits. If the screen is moved by 5 cm towards the slits, the fringe width
changes by 30 m. Given that the slits are 1 mm apart, calculate the wavelength of the light
used.
OR
(II) In Young’s double slit experiment using monochromatic light of wavelength , the intensity
of light at a point where path difference is /3, is K units. What is intensity at the centre of
the bright fringe?

Q19. P and Q are two identical charged particles each of mass 4 × 10–26 kg and charge 4.8 × 10–19
C, each moving with the same speed of 2.4 × 105 m/s as shown in the figure. The two
particles are equidistant (0.5 m) from the vertical Y -axis. At some instant, a magnetic field B is
switched on so that the two particles undergo head-on collision.

Find –
(I) the direction of the magnetic field and

3
 (II) the magnitude of the magnetic field applied in the region.
Q20. Draw a graph showing the variation of binding energy per nucleon as a function of mass
number A. The binding energy per nucleon for heavy nuclei (A > 170) decreases with the
increase in mass number. Explain.
Q21. A potential difference V is applied to a conductor of length l, diameter D. How are the electric
field E, the drift velocity vd and the resistance R affected when (i) V is doubled (ii) l is
doubled.
[ SECTION – C]
Q22. Draw the circuit diagrams for obtaining the V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode.
Explain briefly the salient features of the V-I characteristics in (i) forward biasing, and (ii)
reverse biasing.
Q23. A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery. After sometime the battery is disconnected
and a dielectric slab of dielectric constant K with its thickness equal to the plate separation is
inserted between the plates. How it will affect
(i) the capacitances of the capacitor
(ii) potential difference between the plates
(iii) the energy stored in the capacitors.
Justify your answer in each case.
Q24. Draw a labelled ray diagram showing the formation of an image by an astronomical refracting
telescope in normal adjustment. Hence obtain the expression for its magnifying power.
Q25. A sinusoidal input voltage applied to a device (X) produces an output voltage as shown in the
graph given below. Name the device (X) and explain its working with the help of circuit
diagram.

Q26. On a smooth plane inclined at 30o with the horizontal, a thin current-carrying metallic rod is
placed parallel to the horizontal ground. The plane is located in a uniform magnetic field of
0.15 T in the vertical direction. For what value of current can the rod remain stationary? The
mass per unit length of the rod is 0.30 kgm-1.
Q27. (i) A ray of light incident on face AB of an equilateral glass prism, shows minimum deviation of
30o. calculate the speed of light through the prism.
(ii) Find the angle of incidence on face AB, so that the emergent ray grazes along the face
AC.

4
 Q28. (I) State Gauss's law in electrostatics. Using this law, derive an expression for the electric
field due to a uniformly charged infinite plane sheet.
OR
(ii) (a) Define electric flux and write its SI unit.
(b) Use Gauss’s law to obtain the expression for the electric field due to an infinitely long
straight wire of linear charge density.
.
[ SECTION – D]
Q29. Case Study Based Question
Ferromagnetic substances are those which are strongly magnetised by relatively weak
magnetic field and in the same sense as the applied magnetic field. Iron nickel, cobalt,
gadolinium and their alloys are ferromagnetic. These substances have relative permeability of
the order of hundreds and thousands. The flux density B in a ferromagnetic substance is not
𝐵
directly proportional to the magnetizing force H. Hence the permeability (µ = ) is not a
𝐻
constant. The permeability decreases with rise in temperature. Above curie temperature, a
ferromagnetic substance becomes a paramagnetic substance.
(i) Which of the following is incorrect statement?
(a) Magnetic intensity is a vector quantity.
(b) Induced magnetization is a process where you can magnetise a magnetic material
placing near magnet.
(c) Magnetic intensity and intensity of manetisation are the same.
(d) None of these.
(ii) SI unit of magnetic flux is
(a) Ohm (b) Weber (c) Tesla (d) Weber/m2
(iii) Which of the following has higher magnetic susceptibility?
(a) Diamagnetic (b) paramagnetic (c) Ferromagnetic (d) None of these
(iv) The magnetic susceptibility  of a ferromagnetic material varies with temperature (T) as

5
 OR
(V) There are four light-weight rod samples A,B,C,D separately suspended by threads. A bar
magnet is slowly brought near each sample and the following observations are noted
(I) A is feebly repelled. (II) B is feebly attracted.
(III) C is strongly attracted (IV) D remains unaffected.
Which of the following is correct?
(a) C is of diamagnetic material. (b) D is of a ferromagnetic material.
(c) A is of a non-magnetic material. (d) B is of a paramagnetic material.
Q30. Case Study Based Question
The salient features of photoelectric effect are enumerated below.
An electromagnetic wave travels in the form of discrete packets or bundles of energy
called quanta or photon. All photons emitted by any source travel through free space carrying
an energy E=h and momentum p = h/. The photon energy depends on the frequency  of
the radiation and not its intensity. The transfer of discrete amount of energy from a photon to
a free electron inside the photosensitive metal is the basic cause of photoelectric emission.
(i) Above the threshold frequency the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photo-
electrons increases linearly with
(a) intensity of incident radiation (b) frequency of incident radiation
(c) apparent time of the incident radiation (d) none of these
(ii) Light of wavelength 200nm falls on a metal surface of work function 4.2 eV. The
maximum kinetic energy of the electrons emitted is about
(a) 6.2 eV (b) 2.0 eV (c) 4.2 eV (d) 4.0 eV
(iii) The threshold frequency for photoelectric effect on a metal corresponds to a wavelength
of 300 nm. Its work function is about
(a) 4.0 x 10-19 J (b) 1 J (c) 6.6 x 10-19 J (d) 3.3 X 10-19 J
(iv) The stopping potential for a photoelectric emission process is 2V. Find the maximum
kinetic energy of the electrons ejected in the process.
(a) 3.2 X 10-18 J (b) 1.6 X 10-19 J (c) 3.2 X 10-19 J (d) zero
OR
(v) For which of the following radiations, the cut-off voltage will be maximum
(a) violet (b) ultraviolet (c) X rays (d) infrared

[ SECTION – E]

6
Q31. (I) a) Define resistivity. Explain why resistivity of metals increases and that of semiconductors
decreases with rise in temperature.
b) A series battery of 6 lead accumulators each of emf 2.0 V and internal resistance 0.50 
is charged by a 100 V d.c. supply. What series resistance should be used in the charging
circuit in order to limit the current to 8.0 A? Using the required resistor , obtain the power
supplied by the d.c. source.
OR
(II) a) Using Kirchhoff's laws obtain the equation of the balanced state in a Wheatstone bridge.
b) Two cells of emfs 1.5 V and 2 V and internal resistances 2  and 1  respectively have their
negative terminals joined by a wire of 6  resistance and positive terminals by a wire of 4 
resistance . A third resistance wire of 8  connects middle points of these wires. Draw the
circuit diagram. Using Kirchhoff laws, find the potential difference at the end of this third wire.
Q32. (I) Explain briefly, with the help of a labelled diagram, the basic principle of the working of
an a.c. generator.
In an a.c. generator, coil of N turns and area A is rotated at an angular velocity ω in a uniform
magnetic field B. Derive an expression for the instantaneous value of the emf induced in coil.
What is the average value of emf in one complete revolution of the coil?
What is the source of energy generation in this device?
OR
(II) a) With the help of a diagram, explain the principle of a device which changes a low ac voltage
into a high voltage . Deduce the expression for the ratio of secondary voltage to the primary
voltage in terms of the ratio of the number of turns of primary and secondary winding. For an
ideal transformer, obtain the ratio of primary and secondary currents in terms of the ratio of
the voltages in the secondary and primary coils.
b) Write any two sources of the energy losses which occur in actual transformers.
c) A step-up transformer converts a low input voltage into a high output voltage. Does it violate
law of conservation of energy? Explain.
Q33 (I) a) Draw a ray diagram showing the formation of a real image of an object placed at a
distance ‘u’ in front of a concave mirror of radius of curvature ‘R’. Hence, obtain the relation
for the image distance ‘v’ in terms of u and R.
b) A 1.8m tall person stands in front of a convex lens of focal length 1 m, at a distance of
5m. Find the position and height of the image formed.
OR
(II) a) Draw a ray diagram showing refraction of a ray of light through a triangular glass prism.
Hence obtain the relation for the refractive index (n) in terms of angle of prism (A) and angle
of minimum deviation (m )
b) The radii of curvature of the two surfaces of a concave lens are 20 cm each. Find the
refractive index of the material of the lens if its power is -5.0 D.

7
 Marking Scheme Pre Board-1 2024-25

Sub- Physics class XII

SET 1
Q NO EXPECTED ANSWERS MARKS TOTAL
MARKS
SECTION A 1

1 (A) 1

2 (B) 2 :1 1

3 (B) 18 pF 1

4 (C) 8:27 1

5 (c)  : 4 1

6 (c) n= 4 1

7 (B) 1

8 (C ) I  A2 1

9 (C ) Constant phase difference 1

10 ( D ) - 1.2 cm 1

11 (A) – 3.02 eV 1

12 (C) zero as diffusion and drift currents are equal and opposite. 1

13 (D) 1

14 (A) 1

15 (B) 1

16 (A) 1

SECTION B
17 Correct diagram 1 2
Definition ,relation 0.5+0.5
18  =D/d ’ = D’/d 0.5 2
(D−D’)
-’=
𝑑 0.5
(−’)d
= 𝐷−𝐷′
 = 600 nm
1

1
 OR
Formula of intensity at the maxima 1

Simplification for I= 4K 1

19 (I)The direction of the magnetic field is perpendicular and inward into the 0.5M 2
plane of the paper
(II)For a head-on collision to take place, the radius of the path of each ion
should be equal to 0.5 m.
𝑚𝑣 0.5
R= = 0.5 m
𝑞𝐵
𝑚𝑣 4 𝑋 10−26 𝑋 2.4 𝑋 105 0.5
B= =
𝑞𝑟 4.8 𝑋 10−19 𝑋 0.5
B= 0.04 T 0.5
20 Graph of Ebn vs A 1 2
Explanation 1
21 E= V/l 0.5 2
vd= Ee/m = eV/ml
When V is doubled E is doubled, Vd is doubled, R remains unchanged
When l is doubled, E and vd becomes half and R becomes double.
SECTION-C

22 Ckt dig. forward bias 0.5 3

Ckt diag reverse bias 0.5
V-I characteristics forward bias with explanation 1
V-I characteristics Reverse bias with eplanation 1
23 (i) the capacitance C’ becomes K times the original capacitance. (1) 3
(ii) potential difference V’ decreases and becomes 1/K times of original (1)
value
(iii) Energy stored U’ becomes 1/K times the original energy (1)
24 Ray diagram for astronomical telescope in normal adjustment 1 3
Expression for magnifying power 2
25 Name of the device 0.5 3
Circuit diagram for Full wave rectifier 1.5
Working 1
26 3
0.5

Forces acting on the rod are (i) weight Mg acting vertically downward 1
Horizontal force Fm= IlB due to the vaertical magnetic field B
Mg Sin 30o= IlB Cos 30o
I =( M/l) (g tan 30o/B) 1
= 11.32 A 0.5
27 Prism formula 0.5 3
𝑆𝑖𝑛 45 1 0.5
= = x 2 = √2
sin 30 √2

2
 = speed of light in vacuum/speed of light in prism 0.5
V= c/= 3 x108 / √2 m/s
(ii) e = 90 0.5
Snells law sin c/ sin e =1/ √2 0.5+0.5
I= sin-1 (√2 ),r2=450,r1=150 ,i=sin-1(√2sin150
28 (i) Gauss law statement 0.5 3
Derivation for E due to charged infinite plane sheet with diagram 2.5
OR
Electric flux 0.5
Unit 0.5
Expression for E due to infinitely long straight wire 2
29 (i) c 1 4
(ii) b 1
(iii) c 1
(iv) b 1
Or (v) ( d)
30 (i) b 1 4
(ii) a 1
(iii) c 1
(iv) c 1
Or c

31 (I) (a) Resistivity definition 0.5 5

Variation with temp for metals 1
Variation with temp for semiconductors 1
(b) resistance R = 8 1.5
Power supplied by DC source = 800 W 1

Or
Diagram of wheat stone bridge 0.5
Equation of balanced state 1.5

0.5

0.5
R1= R2=4/2 = 2 
R3= R4= 6/2 = 3 

Applying Kirchoff laws and solving

I1= 5/146 A I2= 18/146 A
Current through 8 resistance I1 + I2 = 23/146 A 1.5
P.D across ends of 8 resistance = 23/146 X 8 = 1.26 V 0.5

3
 32 Diagram 1 5
Principle of working 1
Derivation of emf 2
Avg value = 0 1/2
1/2
Source is Mechanical energy

Or

Principle 1
Diagram 1
Derivation 1.5
Energy losses 1
No violation of principle of conservation of energy 0.5
33. (I) Ray diagram showing formation of real image in a concave mirror 1

Obtaining relation between u,v,R 2

Position of image formed 1
Height of image formed 1
OR

(i) Ray diagram showing refraction of a ray of light through a rectangular 1

glass prism.
2
Obtaining the relation between , A & m
2
Finding refractive index of material of lens  = 1.5

4
 KENDRIYA VIDAYALAYA SANGATHAN, PATNA REGION
FIRST PRE-BOARD, SESSION- 2024-25

CLASS - XII SUBJECT-PHYSICS THEORY (042)

MAXIMUM MARKS:70 TIME ALLOWED: 3 HRS

General Instructions: -

(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.

(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section
C, Section D and Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion
Reasoning based of 1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of
two marks each, Section C contains seven questions of three marks
each, Section D contains two case study based questions of four marks
each and Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks
each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been
provided in one question in Section B, one question in Section C, one
question in each CBQ in Section D and all three questions in Section E.
You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever
necessary
i) c = 3 x 108 m/s ii) me = 9.1 x10-31 kg iii) e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
iv) µ0 = 4π x 10-7 Tm𝑨−𝟏v) h = 6.63 x10-34Js vi) ε0 = 8.854 x10-12𝑪𝟐𝑵−𝟏𝒎−𝟐
vii) Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟑 per gram mole
Section- A `
1:- Beams of electrons and protons move parallel to each other in the
same direction. They

(a) attract each other

(b) repel each other

(c) neither attract not repel

(d) force of attraction or repulsion depends upon speed of beams

Page 1 of 10
 2:- If a diamagnetic substance is brought near the N-pole or the S-pole of
a bar magnet, then it is

(a) attracted by the both poles

(b) repelled by both the poles

(c) repelled by the N-pole and attracted by the S-pole

(d) attracted by the N-pole and repelled by the S-pole

3:- An isolated point charge particle produces an electric field E at a

point 3m away from it. The distance of the point at which the field
is will be
𝟒

(a) 2 m (b) 3 m (c) 4 m (d) 6 m

4:- In an n-type silicon, which of the following statement is correct?

(a) Electrons are majority charge carriers and trivalent atoms are
the dopants.
(b) Electrons are minority charge carriers and pentavalent atoms
are the dopants.
(c) Holes are minority charge carriers and pentavalent atoms are
the dopants.
(d) Holes are majority charge carriers and trivalent atoms are the
dopants.

5:- What is the work done in moving a 5µC point charge from corner A to
corner at B of a square ABCD, when a 20µC exists at the center of square?

(a) 100 J (b) 25 J (c) 0 J (d) 5 J

6:- The radius of the innermost electron orbit of a hydrogen atom is

5.3x10-11m. The radius of the second excited orbit is
(a) 1.01x10-10 m (b) 1.59x10-10 m
(c) 2.12x10-10 m (d) 4.77x10-10 m

7:- Frequency of wave is 6x1010 Hz. The wave is

(a) Radio wave (b) Micro wave
(c) X-Ray (d) None of these

Page 2 of 10
8:- The current in the primary coil of a pair of coils changes from 7A to
3A in 0.04 s. The mutual inductance between the two coils is 0.5H.
The induced emf in the secondary coil is.
(a) 50 V (b) 75 V (c) 100 V (d) 220 V

9:- If an alternating voltage is represented as E=141 Sin 628t, then the

rms value of the voltage and the frequency are respectively
(a) 14IV, 628Hz (b) 100V, 50Hz
(c) 100V, 100Hz (d) 14IV, 100Hz

10:- A current carrying wire kept in a uniform magnetic field will

experience a maximum force, when it is
(a) Perpendicular to the magnetic field
(b) Parallel to the magnetic field
(c) At an angle of 45o to the magnetic field
(d) at an angle of 60o to the magnetic field

11:- Two convex and conclave lenses are in contact and having focal
length 12cm and 18cm, respectively. Focal length of joint lens will
be
(a) 50 cm (b) 45 cm (c)36 cm (d) 18 cm

12:- The de-Broglie wave of a moving particle does not depend on.
(a) Mass (b) Charge (c) Velocity (d) Momentum

For questions 13 to 16 , two statements are given- one labelled

Assesrtion (A) and other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answers
to these questions from the options as given below-

a) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is correct

explanation of assertion.

b) ) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is not the correct
explanation of assertion.

c) If assertion is true but reason is false.

d) If both assertion and reason are false

Page 3 of 10
13:- Assertion (A):- Charge on all the condensers connected in series is
the same.
Reason (R):- Capacitance of capacitor is directly proportional to
charge on it.

14:- Assertion (A):- The pole of magnet cannot be separated by breaking

into two pieces.
Reason(R):- The magnetic moment will be reduced to half when
a magnet is broken into the equal pieces.

15:- Assertion (A):- Photoelectric current depends on the intensity of

incident light.
Reason(R):- Number of photoelectric emitted per second is
directly proportional to the intensity of incident radiation.
16:- Assertion (A):- An uncontrolled chain reaction can become highly
explosive.
Reason(R):- In uncontrolled chain reaction neutrons released in
fission reaction are again and again absorbed by the fissile
isotopes.
Section- B

17:- A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 25MHz travels in free

space along the x- direction. At a particular point in space and
time, ⃗ =6.3 ̂ Vm-1. What is ⃗ at this point?
18:- What do you mean by process of rectification. Draw a circuit
diagram of full wave rectifier.

19:- The work function of a certain metal is 4.2eV. Will this metal give
photoelectric emission for incident radiation of wave length
330nm?
Or
Sketch the graph showing (i) variation of stopping potential with
frequency of incident radiation
(ii) Variation of photoelectric current with anode potential at
constant intensity and different frequency.

20:- Using Huygens principle show that, for a parallel beam incident on a
reflection surface, the angle of reflection is equal to the angle of
incidence.

Page 4 of 10
21:- A battery of emf E, and internal resistance r, gives a current of 0.5A
with an external resistance of 12 Ohm and a current of 0.25A with
an external resistance of 25 Ohm. Calculate (i) internal resistance
of the cell and (ii) emf of the cell.

Section- C

22:- (i) Write Biot- Savart’s law for magnetic field at a point due to a
small current element in vector form.
(ii) Two identical circular wires P and Q each of radius R and
carrying current are kept in perpendicular planes such that they
have a common centre as shown in figure.

Find the magnitude and direction of net magnetic field at the

common centre of two coils.
23:- (i) Draw a graph to show the variation of the angle of deviation with
that of the angle of incidence for a prism.
(ii) A ray of light passes through an equilateral glass prism, such
that the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of emergence. If
the angle of emergence us ¾ times the angle of the prism,
calculate the refractive index of the glass prism. Also find speed of
light in prism.

24:- State Gauss’s theorem in electrostatics. Using this theorem, derive

an expression for the electric field intensity due to an infinitely
long, straight wire of linear charge density

25:- Define the term drift velocity and relaxation time.Derive an

expression for drift velocity of free electrons in a conductor in
terms of relaxation time.

Page 5 of 10
26:- The energy levels of an atom of element X are shown in figure.
A B C
O
D E
-Iev

-3ev

Ground State
-10ev

Which one the level transmissions with result in the emission of photons
of wavelength 620 nm?
Support your answer with mathematical calculations.

27:- Calculate the binding energy per nucleon of Cl nucleus. Given that

Mass of Cl = 34.980000 u
Mass of proton= 1.007825 u
Mass of neutron= 1.008665 u
1 u = 931mev.

Or

(i) Define Binding energy of a nucleus.

(ii) Draw a plot showing the variation of Binding energy per nucleon
with mass number.

28:- State (i) Faraday’s law (ii) Lenz’s law, of electromagnetic induction.

The electric current flowing in a wire in the direction B to A is

decreasing, what is the direction of the magnetic field in the
metallic loop kept above the wire shown is figure.

A Ι B

Page 6 of 10
 Section- D
(Case Study Based Questions)

Read the following paragraph and answer the question follows:

29:- The potential barrier in the p-n junction diode is the barrier in which
the charge requires additional force for crossing the region. In other
words, the barrier in which the charge carrier stopped by the obstructive
force is known as the potential barrier. When a p-type semiconductor is
brought into a close contact with n-type semiconductor, we get a p-n
junction with a barrier potential 0.4 V and width of depletion region is

4.0 x 10-7 m. This p-n junction is forward biased with a battery of voltage
3V and negligible internal resistance, in series with a resistor of
resistance R, ideal milliammetre and key K as shown in figure. When
key is pressed, a current of 20 mA passes through the diode.

(i) The intensity of the electric field in the depletion region when p-n
junction is unbiased is-

(a) 0.5 x 106 V m-1 (b) 1.0 x 106 V m-1 (c) 2.0 x 106 V m-1 d) 1.5 x 106 V m-1

(ii) The resistance of resistor R is-

(a) 150 Ω (b) 300 Ω (c) l30Ω (d) 180 Ω

(iii) In a p-n junction, the potential barrier is due to the charges on either
side of the junction, these charges are-
(a) majority carriers (b) minority carriers

(c) both (a) and (b) (d) fixed donor and acceptor ions.

Page 7 of 10
(iv) If the voltage of the potential barrier is V0. A voltage V is applied to
the input, at what moment will the barrier disappear?

(a) V< v0 (b) V = V0 (c) V > V0 (d) V<< v0

30:- Astronomical telescope

An astronomical telescope is an optical instrument which is used for

observing distinct images of heavenly bodies like stars, planets etc. It
consists of two lenses. The lens having large aperture and greater focal
length is used as objective lens and the lens having smaller aperture and
smaller focal length is used as eye piece. In normal adjustment of
telescope, the final image is formed at infinity. Magnifying power of
astronomical telescope in normal adjustment is defined as the ratio of
the visual angle subtended by final image to the visual angle subtended
by the object at least distance of distinct vision, and it is given by

formula: m = .

i) An astronomical telescope of magnifying power 7 consists of two thin

lenses 40cm apart, in normal

adjustment The focal length of the lenses are-

(a) 5cm,35cm (b) 7cm,35cm (c)17cm, 35cm (d) 5cm, 30cm

ii) An astronomical telescope has a angular magnification 10. In normal

adjustment, distance between the objective and eye piece is 22cm. the
focal length of the objective lens is –

(a)25cm (b)10cm (c)15cm (d)20cm.

iii) For large magnifying power of astronomical telescope-

(a) f0<<fe (b) f0=fe (c) f0>>fe (d)none of these

Page 8 of 10
iv) How does the magnifying power of a telescope change on increasing
the diameter of its objective?
a) Independent b) Doubled c) Halved d) Becomes zero

OR

How much intensity of the image is increased if the diameter of the

objective of a telescope is doubled?
a) Two times b) Four times c) Eight times d) Sixteen times

Section- E
31:- (i) In a young’s double slit experiment, find the condition for
constructive and destructive interference. Hence, write the expression
for the distance between two consecutive bright or dark fringe.

(ii) The fringe width in a Young’s double slit interference pattern is

2.4x10-4m, when red light of wavelength 4000 Ao is used.

Or

(i) What is meant by diffraction of light? What are the conditions for the
angular width of secondary? Maxima and secondary minima obtained in
diffraction pattern.

(ii) Determine the angular separation between central maximum and first
order maximum of the diffraction pattern due to a single slit of width
0.25 mm when light of wavelength 5890 A0 is incident on it normally.

32:- (i) Obtain an expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate (air)
capacitor.

(ii) A network of four capacitors each of 12 µF capacitance is

connected to 500V supply as shown in the figure.
Determine (a) Equivalent capacitance of the network.
(b) Charge on each capacitor.

C2

C2

C1 C3

C4

500 V
Page 9 of 10
 Or

(i) what in equipotential surface?

(ii) Sketch equipotential surface for
(a) a positive point charge
(b) Two equal and opposite charges separated by a small
distance.

(iii) An infinite plane sheet of charge density 10-8 Cm-2 is held in air. In
this situation how far apart are two equivalent surfaces, whose potential
difference is 5V.

33:- (i) A device X is connected across an a.c source of voltage

E= Eo Sin The current through X is given as I= Io sin ( + π/2). Identify
the device X. Write the expression for its reactance. Draw graph
showing variation of voltage and current with time over one cycle of a.c
for X.
(ii) A series LCR circuit consists of a resistance of 10 Ω, a
capacitor of reactance 60 Ω and an inductor coil. The circuit is found to
resonate when put across 300V, 100 Hz supply. Calculate (i) the
inductance of the coil (ii) current in the circuit at resonance.

Or

With the help of a labeled diagram, explain the function, principle,

Construction and working of an a.c generator. Derive expression for
induced emf.
**********************************

Page 10 of 10
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN (PATNA REGION)
CLASS: XII
FIRST PRE-BOARD EXAMINATION
SESSION – 2024 – 25
SUBJECT: PHYSICS (THEORY)
Maximum Marks: 70 Time: 03 Hours
General Instructions:
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, B, C, D and E.
(3) In section – A: question number 1 to 16 are Multiple Choice
(MCQ) type questions carrying 1 mark each.
(4) In section – B: question number 17 to 21 are Short Answer-1 (SA-
1) type questions carrying 2 marks each.
(5) In section – C: question number 22 to 28 are Short Answer-2 (SA-
2) type questions carrying 3 marks each.
(6) In section – D: question number 29 to 30 are case-based
questions carrying 4 marks each.
(7) In section – E: question number 31 to 33 are Long Answer (LA)
type questions carrying 5 marks each.
(8) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been
provided in 2 questions in Section – B, 2 questions in Section – C,
2 questions in Section – D and 3 questions in Section – E.
SECTION – A
(1.) Figure shows electric field lines in which an electric dipole p is
placed as shown. Which of the following statement is correct?

(a) the dipole will not experience any force.

(b) the dipole will experience a force towards right.
(c) the dipole will experience a force towards left.
(d) the dipole will experience a force upwards.

Page 1 of 10
(2) Which of the following is non-ohmic resistance?
(a)Lamp filament (b) Copper wire
(c)Carbon resistor (d) Diode
(3.) A conducting wire of 1 m length is used to form a circular loop. If
it carries a current of 1 ampere, its magnetic moment will be
_____Am2.
(a) 2π (b) (c) (d)
(4.) A bar magnet AB with magnetic moment M is cut into two equal
parts perpendicular to its axis. One part is kept over the other so that
end B is exactly over A. What will be the magnetic moment of the
combination?
(a) Zero (b) (c) (d) M
(5.) Two coils are placed close to each other. The mutual inductance
of the pair of coils depends upon the
(a) rate at which current change in the two coils.
(b) relative position and orientation of the coils.
(c) rate at which voltage induced across two coils.
(d) Current in the two coils.
(6.) In a step-down transformer, the number of turns in the secondary
coil is 20 and the number of turns in the primary coil is 100. If the
voltage applied to the primary coil is 120 V, then what is the voltage
output from the secondary coil?
(a) 24 V (b) 12 V (c) 6 V (d) 18 V
(7.) What is the phase difference between electric and magnetic fields
in an electromagnetic wave?
(a) 0 (b) π (c) π/2 (d) π/4
(8.) How does the magnifying power of a telescope change on
increasing the linear diameter of its objective?
(a) Power increases on increases diameter
(b) Power decreases on decreases diameter
(c) Power remains constant on increases diameter
(d) Power doesn’t depend on diameter
(9.) In a single-slit diffraction experiment, the width of the slit is
halved. The width of the Central maximum, in the diffraction pattern,
will become
(a) one-fourth (b)half (c) twice (d) four time
(10.) The photoelectric effect is based on the law of conservation of
(a) mass (b) momentum
(c) energy (d) none of these

Page 2 of 10
(11.) When an electron in an atom goes from a lower to a higher orbit,
its
(a) kinetic energy decreases, potential energy increases
(b) kinetic energy increases, potential energy decreases
(c) kinetic energy increases, potential energy increases
(d) kinetic energy decreases, potential energy decreases
(12.) The output of the given circuit shown in figure

(a) would be zero at all times.

(b) Would be like a half wave rectifier with negative cycles in
output.
(c) Would be like a half wave rectifier with positive cycles in
output.
(d) Would be like that of a full wave rectifier.

Note : In question number 13 – 16 two statements are given – one

labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason ( R ). Select
the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c)
and (d) as given below :
(a) Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true and (R) is the
correct explanation of (A).
(b) Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true and (R) is NOT the
correct explanation of (A).
(c) Assertion (A) is true and Reason (R) is false.
(d) Assertion (A) is false and Reason (R) is true.
(13.) Assertion : The total charge stored in a capacitor is zero.
Reason : The field just outside the capacitor is σ/ε0 . (σ is the
charge density).
(14.) Assertion : The image of an extended object placed
perpendicular to the principal axis of a mirror, will be erect if
the object is real but the image is virtual.
Reason : The image of an extended object, placed
perpendicular to the principal axis of a mirror, will be erect if
the object is virtual but the image is real.

Page 3 of 10
(15.) Assertion : Bohr had to postulate that the electrons in
stationary orbits around the nucleus do not radiate.
Reason: According to classical physics all moving electrons
radiate.
(16.) Assertion : A photon has no rest mass, yet it carries some
momentum.
Reason : Momentum of photon is due to its energy and due
to its equivalent mass.
SECTION – B
(17.) A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across a
variable resistor R. Plot a graph showing variation of terminal
voltage V of the cell versus the current I. Using the Plot, show
how the emf of the cell and its internal resistance can be
determined.
(18.) A closely wound solenoid 80 cm long has 5 layers of winding
of 400 turns each. The diameter of the solenoid is 1.8 cm. If the
current carried is 8.0 A, estimate the magnitude of ⃗⃗⃗ inside the
solenoid near its centre.
(19.) A concave lens of refractive index 1.5 is immersed in a
medium of refractive index 1.65. What is the nature of the lens?
OR
What is the focal length of a combination of a convex lens of
focal length 30 cm and a concave lens of focal length 20 cm in
contact? Is the system a converging or a diverging lens? Ignore
thickness of lenses.
(20.) Plot suitable graphs to show the variation of photoelectric
current with the collector plate potential for the incident
radiation of
(i) the same intensity but different frequencies v1, v2 and v3
(v1 < v2 < v3)
(ii) the same frequency but different intensities I1, I2 and I3
(I1 < I2 < I3)
OR
Plot a graph showing variation if de-Broglie wavelength λ versus

, where V is accelerating potential for two particles A and B

√
carrying same charge but of masses m1, m2 (m1 > m2). Which one of
the two represents a particle of smaller mass and why?
(21.) Draw energy band diagram of n-type and p-type semi-
Conductors at temperature T> 0K, depicting the donor and
acceptor energy levels. Mention the significance of these levels.
Page 4 of 10
 SECTION – C
(22.) (a) Draw a graph of electric field E versus a distance r from
the centre of the electric dipole for r >> a.
(b) If an electric dipole were kept in a uniform external electric
field E, diagrammatically represent the position of the dipole in
stable and unstable equilibrium and write the expression for
the torque acting on the dipole in both cases.
(23.) In a Wheatstone bridge, P = 1 Ω, Q = 23 Ω, R = 2 Ω, S = 3 Ω and
the galvanometer resistance is 4 Ω. Find the current through the
galvanometer in the unbalanced position of the bridge, when a
battery of 2 V and internal resistance 2 Ω is used.
OR
State Kirchhoff’s Laws. Use these laws, calculate the currents
I1, I2 and I3 in the following circuit diagram:

(24.) Write three points of differences between dia-, para- and ferro-
magnetic materials, giving one example of each.
(25.) An ac source of voltage V = V0 sinωt is connected to a series
combination of L, C and R. Use the phasor diagram to obtain
expression for impedance of the circuit and phase angle
between voltage and current.
(26.) (a) Sketch a schematic diagram depicting oscillating electric
and magnetic fields of an em wave propagating along +x-
direction.
(b) Which of the following electromagnetic waves has
minimum wavelength and minimum frequency? Write one use of
each of these two waves.
Infrared waves, Microwaves, λ-rays and X-rays
(27.) Determine the distance of closest approach when an alpha
particles of kinetic energy 4.5 MeV strikes a nucleus of Z = 80,
stops and reverses its direction.

Page 5 of 10
 OR
An electrons jumps from fourth to first orbit in an atom. How
many number of spectral lines can be emitted by the atom? To
which series these lines correspond?
(28.) A given coin has a mass of 3.0 g. Calculate the nuclear energy
that would be required to separate all the neutrons and protons
from each other. For simplicity assume that the coin is entirely
made of 63
Cu29 atoms (of mass 62.92960 u). The masses of proton
and neutrons are 1.00783 u and 1.00867 u respectively.
SECTION – D
Note : Questions number 29 and 30 are Case Study based questions.
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions.
(29.) Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that
follow:
There are different techniques of fabrication of p-n junction. In one
such technique, called fused junction techniques, an aluminium film is
kept on the wafer of n-type semiconductor and the combination is
then heated to a high temperature (about 6000 C). As a result,
aluminium fused into silicon and produces p-type semiconductor and
in this way a p-n junction is formed.
(i) When a p-n junction is reversed biased, then how does the height of
potential barrier change?
(a) no current flows
(b) the depletion region is reduced
(c) height of potential barrier is decreased
(d) height of potential barrier increased
(ii) The cause of potential barrier in p-n junction is
(a) depletion of positive charges near the junction.
(b) depletion of negative charges near the junction.
(c) concentration of negative charges near the junction.
(d) concentration of positive and negative charges near the junction.
(iii) The circuit has two oppositely connected ideal diodes in parallel.
What is the current flowing in the circuit?

(a) 1.17 A (b) 1.33 A (c) 2.0 A (d) 2.31 A

Page 6 of 10
(iv) When a p-n junction is forward biased, then
(a) only diffusion current flows.
(b) only drift current flows
(c) both diffusion current and drift current flow but drift current
exceeds the diffusion current.
(d) both diffusion current and drift current flow but diffusion current is
more than drift current.
OR
(v) Carbon, germanium and silicon all are fourteenth group element.
(a) C and Ge are semiconductor.
(b) C and Ge are semiconductor.
(c) Si and Ge are semiconductor.
(d) all C, Si and Ge are semiconductor.
(30.) Wavefront is a locus of points which vibrates in same phase. A
ray of light is perpendicular to the wavefront. According to Huygens
principle, each point of the wavefront is the source of a secondary
disturbance and the wavelets connecting from these points spread
out in all directions with the speed of wave. The figure shows a
surface XY separating two transparent media, medium- 1 and
medium-2. The lines ab and cd represent wavefronts of a light wave
travelling in medium- 1 and incident on XY. The lines ef and gh
represent wavefronts of the light wave in medium -2 after refraction.

(i) Select the right option in the following:

(a) Christian Huygen’s a contemporary of Newton’s established the
wave theory of light by assuming that light waves were transverse.
(b) Maxwell provided the theoretical evidence that light is
transverse wave.
(c) Thomas Young experimentally proved the wave behaviour of light
and Huygen’s assumption.
(d) All the statements given above correctly answers the question
“What is light”?

Page 7 of 10
 (ii) Wavefront is the locus of all points, where the particles of the
medium vibrate with the same
(a) phase (b) amplitude
(c) frequency (d) period

(iii) Speed of light is

(a) same in both medium.
(b) larger in medium – 1 than medium -2.
(c) larger in medium – 2 than medium -1.
(d) different at b and d.

(iv) A point source that emits waves uniformly in all directions,

produces wavefronts that are
(a) spherical (b) elliptical
(c) cylindrical (d) plane
OR
(v) What are the types of wavefronts?
(a) Spherical (b) Cylindrical
(c) Plane (d) All of these

SECTION - E
(31.) (a) Define electric flux and write its SI unit.
(b) Use Gauss’ law to obtain the expression for the electric field
due to a uniformly charged infinite plane sheet.
(c) A cube of side L is kept in space as shown in adjoining figure

An electric field ⃗⃗ ̂ N/C exists in the region. Find the

net charge enclosed by the cube.

Page 8 of 10
 OR
(a) Find out capacitance of a capacitor with a dielectric slab of
thickness t between the capacitor plates having separation d.
(b) What happens when the dielectric slab is replaced by a
conducting slab of same thickness?
(c) How would you connect two capacitors across a battery in
series or parallel, so that they store greater (i) total charge and
(ii) total energy.

(32.) (a) With the help of a diagram, explain the principle and
working theory of a moving coil galvanometer. Justify the necessity
of using radial magnetic field in it.
(b) In a galvanometer, there is a deflection of 10 divisions per mA.
The internal resistance of the galvanometer is 78 Ω. If a shunt of
2 Ω is connected to the galvanometer and there are 75 divisions
in all on the scale of the galvanometer, calculate the maximum
current which the galvanometer can read.
OR
(a) State Biot-Savrat’s law. Apply this law to derive an expression
for the magnetic field at the centre of a current-carrying circular
loop.
(b) Two identical circular coils, P and Q each of radius R, carrying
currents 1 A and √ A respectively, are placed concentrically
and perpendicular to each lying in the XY and YZ planes. Find
the magnitude and direction of the net magnetic field at the
centre of the coils.
(33.) (a) Discuss the variation of the angle of deviation with that of
the angle of incidence for a ray of light passing through a
prism. Derive an expression for the refractive index of the
material of a prism in terms of the angle of prism and the angle
of minimum deviation.
(b) A ray of light PQ enters an isosceles right-angled prism ABC of
refractive index 1.5 as shown in adjoining figure:

Page 9 of 10
 (i) Trace the path of the ray through the prism.
(ii) What will be the effect on the path of the ray if the refractive
index of the prism is 1.4?
OR
(a) Draw a ray diagram for final image formed at least distance of
distinct vision (D) by a compound microscope and write an
expression for its magnifying power.

(b) An angular magnification of 22 X is desired for a compound

microscope using an objective of focal length 1.5 cm and
eyepiece of focal length 2.5 cm. How will you set up the
compound microscope (for the final image formed at the least
distance of distinct vision)?

****************************

Page 10 of 10
 केन्द्रीय विद्यालय संगठन, बेंगलरु
ु क्षेत्र
KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, BENGALURU REGION
प्री-बोर्ड परीक्षा – 2024-2025
FIRST PRE-BOARD EXAMINATION – 2024-2025

Class: XII Maximum marks:70

Subject: PHYSICS Time:3hours

General Instructions

(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.

(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based,
of 1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains
seven questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study-based questions
of four marks each and Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks
each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one
question in Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D
and all three questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such
questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
i. c = 3 x 108 m/s
ii. me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
iii. e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
iv. µ0 = 4π x 10-7 Tm𝑨−𝟏
v. h = 6.63 x10-34 Js
vi. ε0 = 8.854 x10-12 𝑪 𝟐𝑵−𝟏𝒎−𝟐
vii. Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟑 per gram mole

1
 SECTION A (16x1=16 marks)
1 A point charge q is kept at a distance r from an infinitely long straight wire with charge density λ. 1
The magnitude of the electrostatic force experienced by charge q is
𝑞𝜆 𝑞𝜆 𝑞𝜆
(a) Zero (b) 2𝜋𝜖 𝑟 (c) 4𝜋𝜖 𝑟 (d) 𝜖 𝑟
0 0 0

2 An inductor L of reactance XL is connected in series with a bulb B to an ac source as shown in the 1

figure.

How does the brightness of the bulb change when number of turns of the inductor is increased?

(a) Increases (b) Decreases (c) Remains same (d) none of these

3 Shape of equipotential surfaces in uniform electric field will be : 1

(a) Spherical normal to electric field (b) Random
(c) Circular normal to electric field (d) Equidistant Planes normal to electric field.

4 The electric resistance of a certain wire of iron is R. If its length and radius are both doubled, then 1
(a) the resistance and the specific resistance, will both remain unchanged
(b) the resistance will be doubled and the specific resistance will be halved
(c) the resistance will be halved and the specific resistance will remain unchanged
(d) the resistance will be halved and the specific resistance will be doubled

5 Magnetic field lines inside an ideal solenoid are: 1

(a) Circular
(b) Straight and parallel
(c) Random
(d) Perpendicular to the axis

6 Identify the property which is not characteristic for a semiconductor? 1

(a) at a very low temperatures, it behaves like an insulator
(b) at higher temperatures two types of charge carriers will cause conductivity
(c) the charge carriers are electrons and holes in the valence band at higher temperatures
(d) the semiconductor is electrically neutral.

2
7 Correct match of column I with column II is 1

Column-l (waves) Column-ll (Production)

1) Infra-red P. Rapid vibration of electrons in aerials
(2) Radio Q . Electrons in atoms emit light when they
move from higher to lower energy level
(3) Light R . Klystron valve
(4) Microwaves S . Vibration of atoms and molecules
(a) 1-P, 2-R, 3-S, 4-Q
(b) 1-S, 2-P, 3- Q, 4-R
(c) 1-Q, 2-P, 3-S, 4-R
(d) 1-S. 2-R, 3-P, 4-Q
8 The line AB in the ray diagram of figure represents a lens. On keeping AB the rays get converged 1
at P. The lens represented by AB is

(a) Concave lens

(b) convex lens
(c) can't say
(d) Both A & B
9 Two thin lenses are in contact and the focal length of the combination is 80 cm. If the focal 1
length of one lens is 20 cm, then the power of the other lens will be
(a) 1.66 D
(b) 4.00 D
(c) – 100 D
(d) – 3.75 D
10 The ratio of the intensities of two light waves from two coherent sources is 9:1. The ratio of the 1
intensities of interference maxima and minima when above two waves interfere is
(a)3:1 (b) 81:1 (c) 4:1 (d) 1:4
11 When radiation of given frequency is incident upon different metals, the maximum kinetic 1
energy of the electrons emitted electrons
(a) decreases with increase of work function

3
 (b) increases with increase of work function
(c) remains same with the increase of work function
(d) does not depend upon work function

12 The radius of 13Al27 nucleus (R0 =1.2× 10−15 m) will be 1

(a) 3.6×10−15 m (b) 2.7×10−15 m
(c) 10.8×10−15 m (d) 4×10−15 m

For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and other labelled
Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the options as given below.
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of Assertion.
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of
Assertion.
(c) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
(d) If both Assertion and Reason are false.
13 Assertion: Kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted by a photosensitive surface depends upon 1
the frequency of incident photon.
Reason: The ejection of electrons from metallic surface is possible with frequency of incident
photon below the threshold frequency.
14 Assertion: Nuclear force between neutron – neutron, proton – neutron and proton -proton is 1
approximately the same.
Reason: The nuclear force does not depend on the electric charge.
15 Assertion : An N-type semiconductor has a large number of electrons but still it is electrically 1
neutral.
Reason : An N-type semiconductor is obtained by doping an intrinsic semiconductor with a
pentavalent impurity
16 Assertion: When number of turns in a coil is doubled, coefficient of self-inductance of the coil 1
becomes 4 times.
Reason: This is because self-inductance is directly proportional to the square of number of turns
in a coil.
SECTION B (05x2=10 marks)
17 Using Huygens’s construction draw a figure showing the propagation of a plane wavefront 2
getting reflected from a plane reflecting surface.
Show that the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of reflection.
18 (a) Define ‘drift velocity’ and obtain an expression for the current flowing in a conducting wire 2
in terms of drift velocity of the free electrons.
OR
(b) Define relaxation time. Obtain relation between relaxation time and resistivity?
19 A closely wound solenoid of 800 turns and an area of cross-section 2.5 × 10–4 m2 carries a 2

4
 current of 3.0 A. Explain the sense in which the solenoid acts like a bar magnet. What is its
associated magnetic moment?
20 The energy of the electron in the nth orbit is given by En = -13.6/n2 eV. Calculate the energy 2
required to excite an electron from ground state to the second excited state
21 a)Name the two processes responsible for the formation of depletion region in a p-n junction 2
diode.
b) Explain the formation of potential barrier with the help of a diagram.
SECTION C : (07x3=21 marks)
22 (a) Define mass defect and binding energy? 3
(b) Calculate the energy required to dissociate a deuteron into its constituent particles (a proton
and a neutron). Given: mass of deuteron = 2.014102 u, mass of proton = 1.007825 u, mass of
neutron = 1.008665 u.

23 Draw a plot showing the variation of photoelectric current with collector plate potential for two 3
different frequencies, ν1 > ν2, of the incident radiation having the same intensity. In which case
will the stopping potential be higher? Justify your answer.

24 With the help of a ray diagram, explain the working of a reflecting telescope. Mention two 3
advantages of a reflecting telescope over a refracting telescope?
OR
With the help of a ray diagram, explain the formation of image in a compound microscope when
the final image is formed at the near point. Obtain the expression for the magnifying power in
this case.

25 (a)Two thin, long, straight, parallel current carrying conductors carrying currents I1 and I2 are 3
kept 'd' distance apart in air. The directions of currents in both the conductors are the same.
Obtain the expression for the magnitude of force per unit length acting on each other and nature
of the force between them. (b) Hence define one ampere.

26 Figure shows two identical capacitors C1 and C2, each of 2 µF capacitance, connected to a battery 3
of 5 V. Initially switch ‘S’ is closed.
Now the switch “S” is opened and dielectric slabs of dielectric constant K = 5 are inserted to fill
completely the space between the plates of the two capacitors.

a) How will the charge and potential difference between the plates of the capacitors be affected
after the slabs are inserted?
b) Find the ratio of energy stored in both the capacitors after introducing dielectric slabs?

5
27 (a) Can potential difference across a cell be greater than its emf? Explain? 3
(b) A battery of emf 10 V and internal resistance 3 Ω is connected to a resistor. If the current in
the circuit is 0.5 A, what is the resistance of the resistor? What is the terminal voltage of the
battery when the circuit is closed?
OR
(a) State Kirchhoff’s rules used in the analysis of electric circuits.

(b) Derive the equation for balanced state of a Wheatstone bridge, using Kirchhoff’s laws.

28 (a) A student wants to use two p-n junction diodes to convert alternating current into direct 3
current. Draw the labeled circuit diagram she would use and explain how it works.
(b) Show graphically the input and output Wave forms.

SECTION D: CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS (02x4=08 marks)

29 Wave Optics: According to Huygens principle, each point of the wave front is the source of a 4
secondary disturbance and the wavelets emanating from these points spread out in all directions
with the speed of the wave. These wavelets emanating from the wave front are usually referred to
as secondary wavelets and if we draw a common tangent to all these spheres, we obtain the new
position of the wave front at a later time.

(i) Using Huygens’s principle we can prove the law of

(a) Reflection only (b) Refraction only
(c) Both the reflection and refraction (d) None of these

(ii) Huygens’s wave theory allows us to know

(a) The wavelength of the wave (b)The velocity of the wave
(c) The amplitude of the wave (d)The propagation of wave fronts

6
 (iii) A ‘wave front’ is the surface of constant
(a)Phase (b)Frequency (c)Wavelength (d)Amplitude

(iv) The wave front due to a source situated at infinity is

(a)Spherical (b)Cylindrical (c) Planar (d) Rectilinear

(OR)
When monochromatic light travels from a rarer to a denser medium, which quantity will not vary
(a) wavelength (b) speed (c ) frequency (d) all the above.

30 Case Study Based Question: Moving coil galvanometer 4

Moving coil galvanometer operates on Permanent Magnet -Moving Coil mechanism and was
designed by the scientist D’Arsonval. It is of two types.(i) Suspended coil and (ii) Pivoted coil
type. Its working is based on the fact that when a current carrying coil is placed in a uniform
magnetic field , it experiences the torque. This torque tends to rotate the coil about its axis of
suspension or pivot in such a way that magnetic flux passing through the coil is maximum.

1. A moving coil galvanometer is an instrument which

(a) to measure emf of a cell

(b) to measure potential difference
(c) to measure resistance
(d) is a deflection type instrument that gives deflection when current passes through the coil.

2. To make the field radial in moving coil galvanometer

(a) Number of turns of the coil is kept small

(b) Horse shoe shaped magnet (OR) set of concave shaped magnetic poles is taken
(c) Poles are very strong magnets

7
 (d) Poles are cylindrically cut

3. The deflection in moving coil galvanometer is

(a) Directly proportional to torsional constant of spring
(b) Directly proportional to number of turns in the coil
(c) Inversely proportional to the area of cross section
(d) Inversely proportional to the current in the coil
4. In a moving coil galvanometer, a coil of N number of turns, area of cross section A and
carrying current I Is placed in radial magnetic field B, then the torque on the coil is
(a) NA2 B2 I (b) NABI2 (c) N2ABI (d) NIAB

(OR)

Current sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer increases if

(a) Magnetic field strength increases

(b) Area of the coil decreases
(c) Number of turns increases.
(d) Both (a) and (c)

SECTION E (03X5=15)
31 (I) (a) Define electric dipole moment. Derive the expression for the electric field of a dipole at a 5
point on the equatorial plane of the dipole.

(b) Two charges +5µC and +20µC are placed 2m apart. At what point on the line joining the two
charges is the electric field zero?

OR

(II) (a) Using Gauss’s law, show that the electric field E at a point due to a uniformly charged
infinite plane sheet is given by E = σ /2ϵ0 , where symbols have their usual meanings.

(b) A point charge +10 μC is at a distance of 5 cm directly above the centre of a square of side 10
cm, as shown in figure. What is the magnitude of the electric flux through the square?

32 (a) With the help of a diagram, explain the principle of the device which changes a low 5
alternating voltage into a high alternating voltage. Deduce the expression for the ratio of
secondary voltage to the primary voltage in terms of the ratio of the number of turns of primary

8
 and secondary winding. For an ideal transformer, obtain the ratio of primary and secondary
currents in terms of the ratio of the voltages in the secondary and primary coils.
(b) Write any two sources of the energy losses which occur in actual transformers.
(c) A step-up transformer converts a low input voltage into a high output voltage. Does it
violate law of conservation of energy? Explain.
OR
A series of LCR circuit is connected to a variable frequency 230 V source,
L = 5.0 H, C = 80μF , R = 40Ω

i. Determine the source frequency which drives the circuit in resonance.

ii. Obtain the impedance of the circuit and the amplitude of current at the resonating frequency.
iii. Determine the rms potential drops across the three elements of the circuit. Show that the
potential drop across the LC combination is zero at the resonating frequency.
33 (i)Write the two conditions for total internal reflection to occur? 5
(ii) Obtain a relation between critical angle and refractive index of a medium.
(iii) Write any two applications of total internal reflection.
(b) A small bulb is placed at the bottom of a tank containing water to a depth of 80 cm. What is
the area of the surface of water through which light from the bulb can emerge out? Refractive
index of water is 1.33. (Consider the bulb to be a point source)
OR
a) Draw the ray diagram showing refraction of ray of light through a glass prism. Derive the
expression for the refractive index n of the material of prism in terms of the angle of prism A and
angle of minimum deviation Dm.
(b)A ray of light PQ enters an isosceles right angled prism ABC of refractive index 1.5 as shown
in figure.
(i)Trace the path of the ray through the prism.
(ii) What will be the effect on the path of the ray if the
refractive index of the prism is 1.4?

---------------------------*****************************----------------------------------------------

9
 FIRST PRE-BOARD EXAMINATION – 2024-2025

SUBJECT: PHYSICS
Class: XII
Maximum Marks: 70

MARKING SCHEME

1. 𝑞𝜆
(b) 2𝜋𝜖 1
0𝑟
2 (b) Decreases 1
3 (d) Equidistant Planes normal to electric field. 1

4 (c) the resistance will be halved and the specific resistance will remain 1
unchanged
5 (b) Straight and parallel 1

6 (c) the charge carriers are electrons and holes in the valence band at higher 1
temperatures

7 (b) 1-S, 2-P, 3- Q, 4-R 1

8 (a )Concave lens 1
9 (d) – 3.75 D 1

10 (c)4:1 1
11 (a) decrease with increase of work function 1
12 (a) 3.6×10−15 m 1

13 c 1
14 a 1
15 b 1
16 a 1
SECTION B
17 Diagram ½ 2
Derivation 1.5M
18 Definition.(1/2) 2
Derivation (1.5 M)
OR
Definition- ½ M
Derivation 1.5 M

1
19 A current-carrying solenoid behaves like a bar magnet because a magnetic 2
field develops along its axis, i.e., along with its length.(1)

The magnetic moment associated with the given current-carrying solenoid

is calculated as:
M=NIA
=800×3×2.5×10−4
=0.6 J/T(1)

20 Second excited state : n=3 2

𝐸𝑛=−13⋅6 eV. ( 0.5 M)
𝑛2
Energy in n=3 quantum state = -1.51 eV. (0.5M)
E=-1.51 -(-13.6) (0.5M)
=12.09 eV (0.5M)

21 Diffusion and Drift ( ½ M + ½ M) 2

Explanation of formation of barrier – 1M
SECTION -C
22 Definitions – 1/2M + ½ M 3

2M

2
23 3

graph- 1M

The photoelectric equation in terms of stopping potential V0 is given

by eV0 =hν − hνo
So, V0 ∝ ν - 1M for explanation
Thus, Stopping potential will be higher for ν1. – 1M

24 Ray diagram-1Mark 3
working of a reflecting telescope-1
two advantages of a reflecting telescope over a refracting telescope-1
OR
Ray diagram-1Mark
Derivation -2Marks

25 Diagram-0.5 M 3
Derivation -1.5 M
Definition of 1Ampere -1 M

26 (i) When switch S is closed : 3

Q1= Q2 = 10 µC ( before dielectric slab)
When Switch is opened and dielectric is introduced,
Q1= KC1 V=50 µC (increases 5 times) , (½ M)
𝑉
Q2 = KC2 𝐾 = 10 µC ( remains same) ( ½ M )
(ii) P.d. across C1 is still 5V ( ½ M)
and across C2 will become

(1/2 M)
(iii) Initially (when the switch is closed) both will store same amount
energy. ( U0)

3
 After the dielectric is introduced :
U1 =KU0
U2 = U0/ K (1/2 M)
𝑈1
= K2 :1 = 25:1 ( ½ M)
𝑈2

27 (a) yes. While charging -- 1M 3

(b) numerical- 2M

OR
i) statements ( ½ M each).
ii) Diagram – ½ M & derivation – 1.5 M
28 Rectifier circuit diagram-1M 3
Working-1M
Input and Output Wave forms-1M
SECTION - D
29 1) c 2)d 3)a 4) c OR 4) c 4
30 1)d 2)b 3)b 4) d OR 4) d 4
31 Definition of Electric Dipole moment- 0.5 M 5
Diagram ( 0.5M ) & Derivation-2 M

4
 (2 M for numerical)

OR
a) Diagram ( 0.5M ) & Derivation-2.5 M
b) Let us assume that the given square be one face of the cube of edge 10
cm. As charge of +10 μC is at a distance of 5 cm above the centre of a
square, so it is enclosed by the cube. Hence by Gauss’s theorem, electric
flux linked with the cube is

(2)

32 (I) (a)TRANSFORMER (5
Diagram-0.5 M Marks
Principle: 0.5 M )
Working: 2M
(b) The two sources of energy losses are eddy current losses and flux leakage
losses. (any two) 1M
(c)There is no violation of the principle of the conservation of energy in a step-up
transformer. When output voltage increases the output current decreases
automatically keeping the power the same.1M

5
 OR

Determination of source frequency -1 M

Obtaining impedance & amplitude – 1M+1 M
Determining RMS drop - 0.5 M for each drop (across L, C, R,
and LC) ( total 2 M)
( Refer NCERT )(II)(1)
33 2- Conditions-0.5 M each – (1Mark) 5
Relation between Critical angle and Ref.Index-1 Mark
2 applications – 1M.
Numerical – correct answer (2M)

OR
Diagram-0.5 Mark
Proving Prism Formula-2.5M
Tracing the Path of light ray -1Mark in each case
C is critical angle.
Sin C=1/1.5=2/3=0.66
C=41.80
When Ref.Index-=1.5, TIR Take place
When Ref.Index-=1.4, TIR will not take place.
here critical angle =45.90 .
For solution : Any other relevant method may be adopted.

6
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGTHAN, CHANDIGARH REGION
PREBOARD EXAM - 2024-25
CLASS: XII
SUBJECT: PHYSICS (THEORY)
Maximum Marks: 70 Time Allowed: 3 hours.
General Instructions:
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based of 1 mark
each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains seven questions of three
marks each, Section D contains two case study based questions of four marks each and Section E
contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one question in Section
B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all three questions in Section
E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
i. c = 3 x 108 m/s
ii. me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
iii. e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
iv. µ0 = 4π x 10-7 TmA-1
v. h = 6.63 x10-34 Js
vi. ε0 = 8.854 x10-12 C2N-1m-2
vii. Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 1023per gram mole

SECTION A
1. A particle of mass m and charge q is placed at rest in uniform electric field E and then released,
the kinetic energy attained by the particle after moving a distance y, will be
a) q2Ey b) qEy c) qE2y d) qEy2
2. Which of the following is NOT the property of equipotential surface?
a) They do not cross each other.
b) The rate of change of potential with distance on them is zero.
c) For a uniform electric field they are concentric spheres.
d) They can be imaginary spheres.
3. A straight line plot showing the terminal potential difference (V) of a cell as a function of current
(I) drawn from it is shown in figure.

The internal resistance of the cell would be then

a) 2.8 ohm b) 1.4 ohm c) 1.2 ohm d) zero
4. An electric current passes through a long straight wire. At a distance of 5 cm from the wire, the
magnetic field is B. The magnetic field at 20 cm from the wire would be
a) B/6 b) B/4 c) B/3 d) B/2
5. Among the following properties describing diamagnetism, identify the property that is wrongly
stated.
a) Diamagnetic materials do not have permanent magnetic moment.
b) Diamagnetism is explained in terms of electro-magnetic induction.
c) Diamagnetic materials have a small positive susceptibility.
d) The magnetic moment of individual electrons neutralize each other.
6. If wattless current flows in the AC circuit, then the circuit is
a) purely resistive circuit
b) LCR series circuit
c) RC series circuit
d) purely inductive circuit.
7. Match list I with list II
List I List II
(p) UV rays (i) diagnostic tool in medicine
(q) X- rays (ii) water purification
(r) Microwave (iii) communication, radar
(s) infrared wave (iv) improving visibility in foggy days
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
a) (p) – (iii), (q) – (ii), (r) – (i), (s) – (iv)
b) (p) – (ii), (q) – (i), (r) – (iii), (s) – (iv)
c) (p) – (ii), (q) – (iv), (r) – (iii), (s) – (i)
d) (p) – (iii), (q) – (i), (r) – (ii), (s) – (iv)
8. A ray of laser of a wavelength 630nm is incident at an angle of 30̊ at the diamond-air interface. It
is going from diamond to air. The refractive index of diamond is 2.42 and that of air is 1. Choose
the correct option.
a) angle of refraction is 24.41̊
b) angle of refraction is 30̊
c) refraction is not possible
d) angle of refraction is 53.4̊
9. If in Young’s double slit experiment of light, interference is performed in water, which one of the
following is correct?
a) fringe width will decrease
b) fringe width will increase
c) there will be no fringe
d) fringe width will remain unchanged.
10. A light having wavelength 300nm falls on a metal surface. Work function of metal is 2.54 eV.
What is stopping potential.
a) 2.3 V b) 2.59 V c) 1.60 V d) 1.29 V
11. According to Bohr atom model, in which of the following transitions, will the frequency be
maximum?
a) n = 3 to n = 2
b) n = 5 to n = 4
c) n = 4 to n = 3
d) n = 2 to n = 1
12. In the following figures, which one of the diodes is reverse biased?

a b

c d
For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and other labelled
Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the options as given below.
a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is correct explanation of Assertion.
b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of Assertion.
c) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) If both Assertion and Reason are false.
13. Assertion: To increase the range of an ammeter, we must connect a suitable high resistance in
series with it.
Reason: The ammeter with increased range should have high resistance.
14. Assertion: To observe diffraction of light the size of obstacle/aperture should be of the order of 10-
7
m.
Reason: 10-7m is the order of wavelength of visible light.
15. Assertion: For the radiation of a frequency greater than the threshold frequency, photo- electric
current is proportional to the intensity of the radiation.
Reason: Greater the number of energy quanta available, greater is the number of electrons
absorbing the energy quanta and greater is number of electrons coming out of the metal.
16. Assertion: Nuclei having mass number about 60 are most stable.
Reason: When two or more light nuclei are combined into a heavier nucleus, then the binding
energy per nucleon will increase.
SECTION B
17. a) Obtained the conditions under which an electron does not suffer any deflection while passing
through a magnetic field.
b) Two protons P and Q moving with same speed pass through the magnetic field B1 and B2
respectively, at right angles to field directions. If B2>B1, which of the two protons will describe
circular path of smaller radius? Explain.
18. A uniform magnetic field gets modified as shown in figure, when two specimens X and Y are
placed in it.
(i) Identify the two specimens X and Y.
(ii) State the reason for the behaviour of the field lines in X and Y.

X Y
Or
 The susceptibility of a magnetic material is 2.6 x 10-5. Identify the type of magnetic material and
state its two properties.
19. Identify the electromagnetic wave whose wavelength lies in the range
(a) 10-11m < λ < 10-14m and (b) 10-4m < λ < 10-6m. Write any one use of each.
20. A hydrogen atom is in its third excited state.
(a) How many spectral lines can be emitted by it before coming to ground state? Show these
transitions in energy level diagram.
(b) In which of the above transitions will the spectral line of shortest wavelength be emitted?
21. (a) Name the device which utilizes unilateral action of a pn diode to convert ac into dc. (b) Draw
the circuit diagram of full wave rectifier.
SECTION C
22. A wire of uniform cross-section and resistance 4 ohm is bent in the shape of square ABCD. Point
A is connected to a point P on DC by a wire AP of resistance 1 ohm. When a potential difference
is applied between A and C, the points B and P are seen to be at the same potential. What is the
resistance of the part DP?

23. The given figure shows a long straight wire of a circular cross-section (radius a) carrying steady
current I. The current I is uniformly distributed across this cross-section. Calculate the magnetic
field in the region r < a and r > a.

Or
Describe the working principle of moving coil galvanometer? Why it is necessary to use (i) a
radial magnetic field and (ii) cylindrical soft iron core in a galvanometer?
Can a galvanometer as such be used for measuring the current?
24. (a) Define mutual inductance and write its SI unit.
(b) Two circular loops, one of small radius r and other of larger radius R, such that R >> r, are
placed coaxially with centres coinciding. Obtain the mutual inductance of the arrangement.
25. An inductor, a capacitor and a resistor are connected in series with an alternating source v =
vmsin⍵t. Derive an expression for the average power dissipated in the circuit. Also obtain the
expression for the resonant frequency of the circuit.
26. Draw the ray diagram explaining the image formation in astronomical refracting type telescope.
Write expression for magnification in normal adjustment. Write any two advantages of reflecting
type telescope over refracting type telescope.
27. An electron and a Photon each have a wavelength 2 nm. Find
a) their momentum
b) the energy of photon and
c) the kinetic energy of electron.
28. Figure shows the variation of stopping potential V0 with the frequency υ of the incidence radiation
for two photosensitive metals P and Q.

(i) Explain which metal has smaller threshold wavelength.

(ii) Explain giving reason which metal emits photoelectrons having smaller kinetic energy for the
same wavelength of incident radiation.
(iii) If the distance between the light source and metal P is doubled, how will the stopping
potential change?
SECTION D
29. Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow.
A semiconductor diode is basically a p-n junction with metallic contacts provided at the ends for
the application of an external voltage. It is a two terminal device. When an external voltage is
applied across a semiconductor diode such that p-side is connected to the positive terminal of the
battery and n-side to the negative terminal, it is said to be forward biased. When an external
voltage is applied across the diode such that n-side is positive and p-side is negative, it is said to
be reverse biased. An ideal diode is one whose resistance in forward biasing is zero and the
resistance is infinite in reverse biasing. When the diode is forward biased, it is found that beyond
forward voltage called knee voltage, the conductivity is very high. When the biasing voltage is
more than the knee voltage the potential barrier is overcome and the current increases rapidly with
increase in forward voltage. When the diode is reverse biased, the reverse bias voltage produces a
very small current about a few micro-amperes which almost remains constant with bias. This
small current is reverse saturation current.
(i) In the given figure, a diode D is connected to an external resistance R = 100  and an emf of
3.5 V. If the barrier potential developed across the diode is 0.5 V, the current in the circuit
will be:

(a) 40 mA (b) 20 mA (c) 35 mA (d) 30 mA

(ii) In an ideal diode the resistance during forward bias will be
(a) infinite (b) zero (c) small (d) large
(iii) Based on the V-I characteristics of the diode, we can classify diode as
(a) bilateral device (b) ohmic device
(c) non-ohmic device (d) passive element
OR
Two identical PN junctions can be connected in series by three different methods as shown in the
figure. If the potential difference in the junctions is the same, then the correct connections will be

(a) in the circuits (1) and (2) (b) in the circuits (2) and (3)
(c) in the circuits (1) and (3) (d) only in the circuit (1)
 (iv)

The V-I characteristic of a diode is shown in the figure. The ratio of the resistance of the diode at I
= 15 mA to the resistance at V = -10 V is
(a) 100 (b) 106 (c) 10 (d) 10-6
30. transparent media of refractive indices n1 and n2 are separated by a spherical transparent surface.
The rays of light incident on the surface get refracted into the medium on the other side. The laws
of refraction are valid at each point of the spherical surface. A lens is a transparent optical medium
bounded by two surfaces, at least one of which should be spherical. The focal length of a lens is
determined by the radii of curvature (R1 and R2) of its two surfaces and the refractive index (n) of
the medium of the lens with respect to the surrounding medium. Depending on R1 and R2 a lens
behaves as a diverging or a converging lens. The ability of a lens to diverge or converge a beam of
light incident on it defines it power.
(i) Ac point object is placed in air at a distance R in front of a convex spherical refracting
surface of radius of curvature R. If the medium on the other side of the surface is glass, then
the image is
(a) real and formed in the glass.
(b) Real and formed in air
(c) Virtual and formed in glass
(d) Virtual and firmed in air
(ii) An object is kept at 2F in front of an equiconvex lens. The image formed is
a) real and of the size of the object
b) virtual and of the size of object
c) real and enlarged
d) virtual and diminished.
(iii) A thin converging lens of focal length 10cm and a thin diverging lens of focal length 20cm are
placed coaxially in contact. The power of the combination is
(a) -5D (b) +5D (c) +15D (d) -15D
(iv) An equiconcave lens of focal length ‘f’ is cut into two
identical parts along the dotted line as shown in the figure. The
focal length of each part will be
(a) f/a (b) f/2 (c) f (d) 2f
OR
A spherical air bubble is embedded in a piece of glass. For a ray of light passing through the
bubble, it behaves like a
(a) converging lens (b) diverging lens
(c) mirror (d) thin plane sheet of glass
SECTION E
31. (a) Explain the term drift velocity of electrons in a conductor .Hence obtain the
expression for the current through a conductor in terms of drift velocity.
 (b) Two cells of emfs E1 and E2 and internal resistances r1and r2 respectively are
connected in parallel as shown in the figure. Deduce the expression for the
(i) equivalent emf of the combination
(ii) equivalent internal resistance of the combination
(iii) potential difference between the points A and B.

Or
a) What is the relation between currents in the figure below. Define the law used in
establishing the relation.

b) A battery or 10 V and negligible internal resistance is connected across the diagonally opposite
corner of a cubical network consisting of 12 resistors each of resistance 1Ω. The total current 1 in
the circuit external to the network is

32. (i) Define a wavefront. How is it different from a ray?

(ii) Using Huygens’s construction of secondary wavelets draw a diagram showing the
passage of a plane wavefront from a denser to a rarer medium. Using it verify Snell’s
law.
(iii)In a double slit experiment using light of wavelength 600nm and the angular width of
the fringe formed on a distant screen is 0.1°. Find the spacing between the two slits.
(iv) Write two differences between interference pattern and diffraction pattern.
Or

(a) Derive expression for the lens maker’s formula using necessary ray diagrams. Also
state the assumptions in deriving the above relation and the sign conventions used.
(b) A beam of light converges at a point P. Now a lens is placed in the path of the
convergent beam 12 cm from P. At what point does the beam converge if the lens is
(i) a convex lens of focal length 20 cm, (ii) a concave lens of focal length 16 cm ?
33. (i) Derive an expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with air present
between the two plates.
(ii)Obtain the equivalent capacitance of the network shown in figure. For a 300 V
supply, determine the charge on each capacitor.
 OR
(i) A dielectric slab of thickness 't’ is kept between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor
with plate separation 'd' (t < d). Derive the expression for the capacitance of the
capacitor. (ii)A capacitor of capacity C1 is charged to the potential of V0. On
disconnecting with the battery, it is connected with an uncharged capacitor of capacity
C2 as shown in the adjoining figure. Find the ratio of energies before and after the
connection of switch S.
 MARKS
Q. MARKING SCHEME (PRE-BOARD)
NO. CLASS – XII
PHYSICS
SECTION A
1. B. 1
2. C. 1
3. A. 1
4. B. 1
5. C. 1
6. D. 1
7. B. 1
8. C. 1
9. A. 1
10. C. 1
11. D. 1
12. B. 1
13. D. 1
14. A. 1
15. A. 1
16. . B 1
SECTION B
17. a) when  = 0̊ or 180̊ 1/2
F= qvB Sin = 0 1/2
When electron moves parallel or antiparallel to the direction of magnetic field, it suffer
no deflection.
b) r = mv/qB as B2>B1 1/2
rQ<rP
the proton Q describe circular path of smaller radius 1/2
18. (i) X is diamagnetic and Y is paramagnetic material 1/2+1
(ii) when a diamagnetic bar is placed in magnetic field, the field lines are repelled or /2
expelled and the field inside the material is reduced.
1/2+1
When a paramagnetic bar is placed in a magnetic field, the field lines get concentrated /2
inside the material and hence the field is increased.
Or
As the susceptibility is positive and small, the magnetic material is paramagnetic 1
material.
Any two properties. 1
19. (a) Gamma rays, any one use. 1
(b) Infrared rays, any one use. 1

20. (a) here n = 4. Total number of spectral lines emitted = n(n-1)/2 = 4x3/2 =6 1/2
n=3 -0.85 eV
n=2 -1.51 eV 1
n= 1 -3.4 eV

n=0 -13.6 eV
(b) the spectral line of shortest wavelength will be emitted in the transition n = 4 to n = 1 as
it correspond to the photon of maximum energy. 1/2
21. (a) Rectifier 1
(b) Circuit diagram of full wave rectifier

SECTION C

22. 1.5

As point B and P are at same potential, the bridge is balanced and hence
1.5
23. (a) Consider the case r > a. The Amperian loop, labelled 2, is a circle concentric with the 1.5
cross-section. For this loop, L = 2 π r
Using Ampere circuital Law, we can write,
B (2π r) = μ0 I
B = 0I/ 2r
B  1/r (r > a)
(b) Consider the case r < a. The Amperian loop is a circle labelled 1. For this loop, taking
the radius of the circle to be r, L = 2 π r. Now the current enclosed Ie is not I, but is less
than this value. Since the current distribution is uniform, the current enclosed is,
Ie = I(πr2/πa2) = I(r2/a2) 1.5
Using Ampere circuital Law, we can write,
B (2π r) = μ0 I (r2/a2)
B = (0I/ 2 a2) r
B  r (r<a)
Or
Principle of moving coil galvanometer: A current carrying coil placed in a magnetic
field experiences a current dependent torque, which tends to rotate the coil and produce
angular deflection. 1/2
(a) Radial magnetic field maximize the torque on the coil by making τ = NIAB Sin90̊ =
NIAB and provide linear current scale. 1
(b) A cylindrical soft iron core makes the field radial. This increase the strength of magnetic
field and hence increase the sensitivity of galvanometer. 1/2
A galvanometer as such cannot be used to measure current in the circuit due to two
reasons.
(i) Galvanometer can only detect small currents and its coil is likely to be damaged by
currents of (mA/A) range.
(ii) For measuring current it has to be first calibrated.
1
24. Mutual Induction: Mutual induction is the phenomenon of production of induced emf in 1/2
one coil due to a change of current in the neighbouring coil. SI unit of mutual induction is
Henry. 1/2
 1/2
Let a current IP flow through the circular loop of radius R. The magnetic induction at
the centre of the loop is
BP = µ0IP/2R
As, r << R, the magnetic induction BP may be considered to be constant over the entire 1/2
cross sectional area of inner loop of radius r. Hence magnetic flux linked with the
1/2
smaller loop will be
φS = BPAS =(µ0IP/2R)πr2 1/2
φS = M IP
M = (µ0/2R)πr2
25. For a LCR series circuit
<P> = <vi> = <(vmSin⍵t)(imSin⍵t+φ)> = (vmimCosφ)/2 1.5
For resonance XL = XC 1/2
⍵L = 1/⍵C 1
⍵ = 1/√LC
26. Correct diagram 1.5
M = -fo/fe 1/2
Any two advantages 1/2+1
/2
27. Here λ = 2nm
a) both electron and photon have same momentum. i.e. p = h/λ = 3.315 x 10-25 Kgms-1 1
b) energy of photon E = hc/λ = 9.945 x 10-17 j= (9.945 x 10-17/1.6 x 10-19)
= 6.22 x 102 eV 1
c) Kinetic energy of electron = p2/2m = 0.377eV
1
28. (i) Threshold wavelength λ0 = c/υ0 1
As υ0 (Q) > υ0 (P)
λ0(Q) < λ0(P)
thus metal Q has smaller threshold wavelength.
(ii) According to Einstein’s photoelectric equation 1
hc/λ = hc/ λ0 + kinetic energy of photoelectron
for the same λ of incident radiation, LHS is constant. So metal Q with smaller value of
λ0 will emit photoelectron of smaller kinetic energy.
(iii) Stopping potential V0 will remain same because it is independent of intensity and hence
of distance between the light source and metal surface. 1
SECTION D
29. (i) d 1
(ii) b 1
(iii) c or b 1
(iv) d 1

30. (i) a 1
(ii) a 1
(iii) b 1
1
(iv) b or b
SECTION E
31. Drift velocity: It is the average velocity acquired by the free electrons superimposed over 1/2
the random motion in the direction opposite to electric field and along the length of the
 metallic conductor.
Derivation I = ne A Vd 1.5
Here, I = I1 + I2 …
(i) Let V = Potential difference between A and B.
For cell E1 Then,
V= E1 – I1 r1
I1 = (E1 -V)/r1

Similarly for cell E2 Then,

V= E2 – I2 r2
I2 = (E2 -V)/r2
I = (E1 -V)/r1 + (E2 -V)/r2
I = (E1/r1 + E2/r2) - V(1/r1 +1/r2)
V = {(E1r2 + E2r1)/r1+r2} - I(r1r2/r1+r2)
Comparting the above equation with the equivalent circuit of emf ‘Eeq’ and internal
resistance ‘req’ then, V = Eeq - Ireq
(i) Eeq = {(E1r2 + E2r1)/r1+r2}
(ii) req = (r1r2/r1+r2)
(iii) The potential difference between A and B, V = Eeq - Ireq
Or
(a) i2 = i1 + i3 + i4 +i5 2
Definition
(b) Next, take a closed loop, say ABCCEA, and apply Kirchhoff’s
3
second law:
-IR - (1/2)IR IR + emf = 0.
Where R is the resistance of each edge and the emf of battery.
Thus,
emf = (5/2) IR
The equivalent resistance R of the network is = emf/3I = (5/6)R.
For R = 1 ohm, R = (5/6) ohm and for emf = 10 V, the total current (= 3I) in the network is
3I = 10V/(5/6) = 12 A.
Hence, the total current I in the circuit external to the network is : 12 A.
32. (i) A wavefront is defined as a surface of constant phase.
(a) The ray indicates the direction of propagation of wave while the wavefront is the 1
surface of constant phase.
(b) The ray at each point of a wavefront is normal to the wavefront at that point.
(ii) AB: Incident Plane Wave Front & CE is Refracted Wave front .
Sin i =BC/AC & Sin r = AE /AC
Sin i / Sinr = BC /AE = v1 /v2 = constant
2

(iii) Ѳ = λ /a i.e. a = λ/Ѳ = 6 x 10-7/0.1 x Π/180 = 304 x 10-4 m

 (iv) Two differences between interference pattern and diffraction pattern
Or 1
1
(a) Correct derivation
(b) correct answers 7.5cm and 48cm respectively
3
2
33. (i) Derivation of the expression for the capacitance 2

Let the two plates be kept parallel to each other separated by a distance d and cross-
sectional area of each plate is A. Electric field by a single thin plate
E = σ /2ϵo
Total electric field between the plates E= σ / ϵo = Q/A ϵo
Potential difference between the plates V=Ed = [Q/A ϵo ] d.
Capacitance C= Q/ V = Aϵo / d
(ii)

The equivalent capacitance = 200/3 pF 1/2

charge on C4 = 200/3 x 10 −12 × 300 =2 × 10–8 C
potential difference across C4 = 200 x 10-12 x 300/3 x 100 x 10-12 = 200 V 1/2
potential difference across C1 = 300 – 200 = 100 V
charge on C1 = 100 × 10–12 × 100 = 1 × 10–8 C 1/2
potential difference across C2 and C3 series combination = 100 V
potential difference across C2 and C3 each = 50 V
charge on C2 and C3 each = 200 × 10–12 × 50 = 1 × 10–8 C 1/2
OR
(i) Derivation of the expression for capacitance with dielectric slab (t < d)
3

(ii)
Before the connection of switch S,
Initial energy Ui = 1/2 C1V02 + 1/2 C202 = 1/2 C1V02 1/2
After the connection of switch S
common potential V = (C1V1 + C2V2)/C1+C2 = C1V0/(C1+C2) 1/2
Final energy = Uf =1/2 (C1+C2)(C1V0)2/(C1+C2)2
Uf : Ui = C1 /(C1 + C2 ) 1/2

1/2
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN CHENNAI REGION
CLASS – XII
PRE-BOARD -1 EXAMINATION 2024-25

PHYSICS
Maximum Marks: 70 Time Allowed: 3 hours

General Instructions
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.

(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E.

(3) All the sections are compulsory.

(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based of 1 mark
each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains seven questions of
three marks each, Section D contains two case study-based questions of four marks each and
Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one question in Section
B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all three questions in
Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.

(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary

i. c = 3 × 108 m/s

ii. me = 9.1 ×10-31 kg

iii. mp = 1.7 ×10-27 kg

iv. e = 1.6 × 10-19 C

v. µ0 = 4π × 10-7 T m A-1

vi. h = 6.63 ×10-34 J s

vii. ε0 = 8.854 ×10-12 C2N-1m-2

viii. Avogadro’s number = 6.023 × 1023 per gram mole

Page 1 of 9
 SECTION ‘A’
01. An electric dipole is at stable equilibrium in a uniform external electric field when the angle
between 𝑝⃗⃗⃗ 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐸⃗ .

A) 900 B) 1800 C) 00 D) 2700

02. In an ac circuit at resonance the power factor is

A) 1 B) 0 C) 0.5 D) 1.414

03. Which one of the following instrument has least resistance?

A) Ammeter of range 0-1 amp
B) Voltmeter of range 0-1 volt
C) Ammeter of range 0-10 amp
D) Voltmeter of range 0-10 volt

04.

1
The Coulomb force versus 𝑟 2 graphs for two pair of charges (𝑞1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑞2 ) and (𝑞2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑞3 ) are
shown. The charge 𝑞2 is positive and has least magnitude then, magnitude of chares related
as:
A) 𝑞1 > 𝑞2 > 𝑞3 B) 𝑞1 > 𝑞3 > 𝑞2
C) 𝑞3 > 𝑞2 > 𝑞1 D) 𝑞3 > 𝑞1 > 𝑞2
05. The minimum distance between an object and its real image formed by a convex lens of focal
length ‘f’ is :
A) f B) 6f C) 2f D) 4f

06. When a plane wave front is refracted by a convex lens of focal length ‘f” , the refracted wave
front is a
A) Spherical wave front with radius f
C) Spherical wave front with radius f/2
B) Spherical wave front with radius 2f
D) Spherical wave front with radius 4f

Page 2 of 9
07. The ratio of nuclear radii of two nuclei of mass number 27 and 64 is
A) 9 B) 27 C) 3 D)
3
289 64 4 √
17

08. Which one of the following diodes is conducting

A) B)

C) D)

09. Approximate energy released in a complete fusion of uranium 235 is:

A) 200 MeV B) 400 MeV C) 200 KeV D) 100 MeV

10. Which of the following graphs represents the variation of momentum of a particle with the
de-Broglie wavelength associated with it

A) B)

C) D)

11. A convex lens of focal length 30cm is in contact with a concave lens of focal length 20cm?
Then this act as a
A) Converging lens of focal length 60 cm
B) Diverging lens of focal length 60 cm
C) Converging lens of focal length 12 cm
D) Diverging lens of focal length 12 cm
12. At the centre of the dipole
A) Electric field = 0 and potential = 0
B) Electric field≠ 0 and potential = 0
C) Electric field ≠ 0 and potential ≠ 0
D) Electric field = 0 and potential ≠ 0

Page 3 of 9
 Assertion and Reason type questions
For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and other
labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the options as given
below.
A. If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of
Assertion.
B. If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of
Assertion.
C. If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
D. If both Assertion and Reason are false.

13. Assertion (A) Magnetic field lines form closed loops.

Reason (R) Source of magnetism is electric current.
14. Assertion (A) Electric potential energy is negative
Reason (R) Work is done in the direction of the electric field
15. Assertion (A) Isotones have identical chemical behavior.
Reason (R) They have same electronic structure.
16. Assertion (A) Gamma rays have very high penetrative power.
Reason (R) The speed of gamma rays in free space is 3 × 108 𝑚/𝑠

SECTION ‘B’
17. A short bar magnet of magnetic moment m = 0.32 JT–1 is placed in a uniform magnetic field of
0.15 T. If the bar is free to rotate in the plane of the field, which orientation would correspond
to its (a) stable, and (b) unstable equilibrium? What is the potential energy of the magnet in
each case?
18. A charge of 6 μC is given to a hollow metallic sphere of radius 0.2 m. Find the potential at
(i) the surface and (ii) the centre of the sphere.
19. I The radius of the innermost electron orbit of a hydrogen atom is 5.3× 10–11 m. What is
the De-Broglie’s wavelength corresponds to the third level of the hydrogen atom?
[OR]
II a) Draw the energy level diagram of a hydrogen atom for levels 1 to 4.
b) Calculate the potential and kinetic energy of the electron in the ground state of a
hydrogen atom.
20. a) Draw the cross sectional view of varying electric field and magnetic field between the
plates of a parallel plate capacitor connected to an alternating source of emf.
b) State the generalised Ampere circuital law called as Ampere-Maxwell law.
21. In this V-I graph dashed line represents the
linear Ohm’s law. The solid line is the
voltage V versus current I for a good
conductor. This graphs shows Ohm’s law is
violated at high current region. Why?

Page 4 of 9
 SECTION ‘C’

22. Four identical cells, each of emf 2 V, are joined in parallel providing supply of current to
external circuit of resistance 7.5Ω The terminal voltage of the cells, as read by an ideal
voltmeter is 1.6 volt. Calculate the internal resistance of each cell by drawing a correct circuit
diagram of the arrangement.

23. a) Prove Snell’s law using Huygens principle.

b) A ray of monochromatic light propagating in air, is incident on the surface of water and
partially reflected and partially refracted. Which characteristic of the wave is same for both
reflected and refracted waves?

24. a) Draw the V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode for forward and reverse biased
conditions.
b) What do you mean by cut-in voltage?
c) Why the reverse current is very small and saturated within the limit of breakdown voltage?

25. a) Draw the graph showing the binding energy per nucleon as a function of mass number.
16
b) If the mass defect of 8𝑂 is 0.13691u calculate it’s binding energy per nucleon in MeV.

26. I a) Derive an expression for self-inductance of a solenoid. Write the expression for
the self-inductance of the solenoid if it’s interior is a material of relative
permeability μr.
b) Why work has to be done to vary current in a solenoid?
[OR]
II a) You are given three circuit elements X, Y and Z. They are connected one by one
across a given ac source. It is found that V and I are in phase for element ‘X’, V
leads I by (π/2) for the element ‘Y’ while I leads V by (π/2) for the element. Identify
elements X, Y and Z.
b) Establish the expression for impedance of circuit when elements X, Y and Z are
connected in series with an ac source.

27. In the experimental set up for study of photoelectric effect, the cathode is coated with cesium
of threshold frequency 5.16×1014 Hz. Frequency of incident radiation on the cathode is 6.6×
1014 Hz and number photons incident per second is 5× 1015.
a) For this data draw the graph for the variation of photoelectric current with collector
plate potential.
b) If the threshold frequency of calcium is 7.7×1014 Hz, draw a graph showing Variation
of stopping potential V0 with frequency n of incident radiation for cesium and calcium.

28. With a circuit diagram explain the working of half wave rectifier and draw the input and output
waveforms.

Page 5 of 9
 SECTION ‘D’
Case Study Based Question
29. Aurora Boriolis
In Polar Regions like Alaska and Northern Canada, a splendid display of colours is seen
in the sky. The appearance of dancing green pink lights is fascinating, and equally puzzling.
This phenomenon is called Aurora Boriolis in physics. An explanation of this natural
phenomenon is now found in physics, in terms motion of charges in a magnetic field.
Consider a charged particle of mass m and charge q, entering a region of magnetic field
⃗ with an initial velocity 𝑣. When 𝑣 is inclined to 𝐵
𝐵 ⃗ the velocity have a component 𝑣𝑝 parallel
to the magnetic field and a component 𝑣𝑛 normal to it. There is no force on a charged particle
in the direction of the field. Hence the particle continues to travel with the velocity 𝑣𝑝 parallel
to the field. The normal component 𝑣𝑛 of the particle results in a Lorentz force (𝑣𝑛 × 𝐵 ⃗ ) which
is perpendicular to both 𝑣𝑛 and 𝐵 ⃗ . Hence the particle thus has a tendency to perform a circular
motion in a plane perpendicular to the magnetic field. When this is coupled with the velocity
parallel to the field, the resulting trajectory will be a helix along the magnetic field line. Even
if the field line bends, the helically moving particle is trapped and guided to move around the
field line. Since the Lorentz force is normal to the velocity of each point, the field does no work
on the particle and the magnitude of velocity remains the same.
⃗ , answer the following questions
If 𝜃 is the angle between 𝑣 and 𝐵
I. The ratio of pitch of the helix to it’s radius is
A) 2𝜋 /tan 𝜃 B) 2𝜋 tan 𝜃
C) 2𝜋 cos 𝜃 D) 2𝜋 sin 𝜃
II. Which one of the following is independent of 𝜃, when the charges particle is executing helical
motion
A) Pitch B) Radius
C) Frequency D) None of the above
III. A charged particle with a velocity 𝑣𝑖̂ enters a region with uniform magnetic field 𝐵𝑗̂ then the
particle will undergo
A) Helical motion in x-z plane B) Circular motion in x-y plane
C) Circular motion in y-z plane D) Circular motion in x-z plane
IV. i) If ‘R’ is the radius of a proton executing uniform circular motion in a uniform magnetic
field. What will be the radius of an alpha particle projected in to the same field under the
same condition?
A) R/4 B) R/2 C) 2R D) 4R

[OR]
ii) If the proton is moving parallel to uniform magnetic field with constant velocity 𝑣, the
force acting on the proton is

Page 6 of 9
 A) Be/v B) Bev C) B/ev D) Zero

30. Lenses and lens maker’s formula

A lens is a transparent optical medium bounded by two surfaces; at least one of which
should be spherical. There are different types of lenses, double convex lens, double concave
lens, plano-convex lens, plano-concave lens and concavo convex lens. Lens makers formula is
applicable to all these lenses. It is useful to design lenses of desired focal length using surfaces
of suitable radii of curvature and medium of suitable refractive index. For concavo-convex one
surface is convex and the other surface is concave, the nature of the lens depends on the radius
of curvature of these surfaces when other factors remain the same.
I. Is it possible to have two lenses of same radius of curvature (equi-convex or equi-concave) can
have different focal length when kept in the same medium.
A) No they should have different radius of curvature.
B) Yes they should have different refractive index.
C) Yes they should have same refractive index.
D) No the surrounding medium should be different.
II. Concavo-convex lenses are used to make
A) spectacles with power
B) spectacles without power
C) spectacles with protection from various hazards like uv radiation etc.
D) all the above
III. When a plano-convex lens of made of a material of refractive index 1.47 disappears when
immersed in a liquid
A) then the refractive index of the liquid is equal to 1.47
B) then the refractive index of the liquid is greater than 1.47
C) then the refractive index of the liquid is less than 1.47
D) then the refractive index of the liquid must be 1.
IV i. Two double convex lenses (both spherical has same
radius of curvature) of focal length ‘f’ is made-up of
transparent medium of refractive index 𝑛2 kept in a
medium of refractive index 𝑛1 . The lenses are cut in
to two equal halves as shown. What will happen to
the focal length and the brightness of the image
formed by the pieces of these lenses marked as ‘1’ and
‘2’? (neglect the thickness of the lens)
Options For the piece ‘1’ For the piece ‘2’
Focal length Brightness Focal length Brightness
A) Doubles Same Same Same
B) Same Becomes half Becomes half Becomes half
C) Doubles Same Same Becomes half
D) Doubles Becomes half Doubles Becomes half

Page 7 of 9
 [OR]
IV. ii. Focal length of double convex lens in air is ‘f’. What will happen to the focal length of
this lens when it is immersed in water of refractive index 1.33, the refractive index of glass
is 1.5.
A) no change
B) 3.9 f
C) f becomes infinity
D) f / 3.9
SECTION ‘E’
31 I a) Using Gauss law drive the expression for electric field due to charged conducting
sphere of radius ‘R’ on a point with a position vector 𝑟 with respect to the centre
of the sphere when r > R and r < R.
b) A charge of +q coulomb is kept between two
uniformly charged infinite parallel plane
sheets of surface charge density + σ and – σ.
Find the magnitude and direction of the force
acting on the charge q.
What will happen to the electric field outside
the plates when the space between the plates
is filled with a dielectric material with a
dielectric constant ‘K’.

[OR]
II a) Derive an expression for the capacitance of a capacitor when dielectric slab of
dielectric constant ‘K’ inserted between the plates of the capacitor fully occupying
the intervening region.

b) Two slabs of dielectric constants 2K

and K fill the space between the
plates of a parallel plate capacitor of
plate area ‘A’ and plate separation ‘d’
as shown in figure. Find an
expression for capacitance of the
system.
32 I a) i. Trace the path of a ray of light showing refraction through a triangular prism and
hence obtain an expression for angle of deviation ( 𝛿) in terms of A, i and e,
where symbols have their usual meanings.
ii. Draw a graph showing the variation of angle of deviation with the angle of
incidence.
b) Complete the ray diagram if the
refractive index of the material of the
prism is √2 . Explain what happens
to the ray of light whenever it under
goes refraction at different interfaces.

Page 8 of 9
 [OR]
II a) Derive an expression for resultant amplitude due to interference of two light waves
of amplitude ‘a’ and angular frequency ‘ω’ with a phase difference Φ
If I0 is the intensity of the interfering waves what is the intensity of the resultant if
i) Φ is constant and ii) Φ is varying with time
b) Why two identical independent ordinary light sources like sodium lamp never be
coherent.
c) In Young’s double-slit experiment using monochromatic light of wavelength λ, the
intensity of light at a point on the screen where path difference is λ, is K units.
What is the intensity of light at a point where path difference is λ/3?
33 I a) With a labelled diagram of an ac generator briefly explain the working of the
generator and derive the expressions for instantaneous emf.

b) A circular coil of radius 8.0 cm and 20 turns is rotated about its vertical diameter
with an angular speed of 50 rad s–1 in a uniform horizontal magnetic field of
magnitude 3.0 × 10–2 T. Obtain the maximum and average emf induced in the coil.
If the coil forms a closed loop of resistance 10 Ω, calculate imax and irms.
[OR]
II a) With a labelled diagram of a transformer briefly explain the working of the
transformer and derive an expression for transformer ratio.

b) A small town with a demand of 800 kW of electric power at 220 V is situated 15

km away from an electric plant generating power at 440 V. The resistance of the
two wire line carrying power is 0.5 Ω per km. The town gets power from the line
through a 4000-220 V step-down transformer at a sub-station in the town. If the
town gets power from the line through 40,000-220 V step down transformer, how
much power could be saved?

Page 9 of 9
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN CHENNAI REGION
CLASS – XII
PRE-BOARD EXAMINATION 1
PHYSICS Maximum Marks: 70
Marking Scheme.

01 C) 00 1
02 A) 1 1
03 C) Ammeter of range 0 -10 amp 1
04 D) 𝑞3 > 𝑞1 > 𝑞2 1
05 D) 4f 1
06 A) Spherical wave front with radius f 1
07 C) 3/4 1
08 B) 1

09 A) 200 MeV 1
10 A) 1

11 B) Diverging lens of focal length 60 cm 1

12 B) Electric field≠ 0 and potential= 0 1
13 A) Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of Assertion. 1
14 C) Assertion is true but Reason is false 1
15 D) Both Assertion and Reason are false. 1
16 B) Both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of Assertion 1
SECTION ‘C’
17 Stable equilibrium when 𝑚 ⃗
⃗⃗ is parallel to 𝐵 ½ 2
Corresponding potential energy 𝑈 = −𝑚𝐵 = −4.8 × 10−2 𝑗𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 ½
Stable equilibrium when 𝑚 ⃗
⃗⃗ is anti-parallel to 𝐵 ½
Corresponding potential energy 𝑈 = +𝑚𝐵 = +4.8 × 10−2 𝑗𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒 ½

18 Electrical potential on the surface of the spherical shell 2

1 𝑞 ½
𝑉=
4𝜇𝜀0 𝑟
9 × 10 × 6 × 10−6
9 ½
𝑉= = 2.7 × 105 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
0.2
Since electric field inside the hollow sphere is zero, hence V remains constant ½
throughout the volume.
Potential at the centre of the sphere is 2.7 × 105 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 ½

Page 1 of 12
19 I i. 𝑟𝑛 = 𝑛2 𝑟1 = 32 × 5.3 × 10−11 ½ 2

2𝜋𝑟𝑛 = 𝑛𝜆𝑛
2𝜋𝑟𝑛
𝜆𝑛 = 𝑛

2𝜋𝑛2 𝑟1
𝜆𝑛 = = 2𝜋𝑛𝑟1 ½
𝑛
½
2 × 3.14 × 32 × 5.3 × 10−11
𝜆3 =
4
½
= 37.44 × 10−11 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟
[OR]
II a)

E= -13.6 eV
½
U=2E = -27.2 eV
½
K=-E=13.6eV
20 a) 2
1

1
𝑑𝛷𝐸
⃗⃗⃗ = 𝜇0 𝑖𝑐 + 𝜇0 𝜀0
⃗ . 𝑑𝑙
Correct Statement or ∫ 𝐵 𝑑𝑡

21 2
In the low current region, the current generate less amount of heat which is dissipated to 1
surrounding and the conductor is at thermal equilibrium with the surrounding so there is
no rise in temperature hence the resistivity of the material is not changing.
1
At high current region heat generated is more than the heat dissipated. The heat retained
by the conductor increases the temperature of the wire hence the resistivity increases in
high current region.

Page 2 of 12
 SECTION ‘C’
22 I 3

Let 𝑟 ′ be the net internal resistance of the group of four cells then
𝜀−𝑉 ½
𝑟′ = 𝑅 ( )
𝑉
2 − 1.6 15
= 7.5 ( )= 𝛺 ½
1.6 8
As ‘r’ is the internal resistance of each cell
½
1 4
=
𝑟′ 𝑟
∴ 𝑟 = 4 × 𝑟′
15 ½
=4× = 7.5𝛺
8

23 a) 3
1

In the right angled triangle ABC

𝐵𝐶 𝜏𝑣1 ½
sin 𝑖 = =
𝐴𝐶 𝐴𝐶
In the right angled triangle ACE
𝐴𝐸 𝜏𝑣2 ½
sin 𝑟 = =
𝐴𝐶 𝐴𝐶
sin 𝑖 𝜏𝑣1 𝑣1 𝑛2
= = = = 𝑛21
sin 𝑟 𝜏𝑣2 𝑣2 𝑛1 ½

b) frequency ½
Page 3 of 12
24 3
1

In forward biased condition, the current first increases very slowly, almost negligibly, till 1
the voltage across the diode crosses a certain value. After the characteristic voltage, the
diode current increases significantly. This voltage is called the threshold voltage or cut-in
½
voltage.
Reverse current is due to the minority carriers of both sides of the diode. ½
Very small reverse voltage is sufficient to sweep all the minority carriers from one side of
the junction to the other side of the junction.
25 3

1½

𝐸𝑏 = 𝑚𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑑𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑖𝑛 𝑎𝑚𝑢 × 931.5 𝑀𝑒𝑉/𝑐 2 ½

𝐸𝑏 ½
𝐸𝑏𝑛=
𝐴
0.13691 × 931.5 127.5
𝐸𝑏𝑛= = = 7.96 𝑀𝑒𝑉/𝑐 2 ½.
16 16
26 I a) Flux linkage through a solenoid of N turns is proportional to the current through the ½ 3
solenoid
𝑁𝛷𝐵 𝛼 𝐼
½
𝑁𝛷𝐵 = 𝐿 𝐼, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝐿 𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑠𝑒𝑙𝑓 𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑜𝑖𝑑
Consider a solenoid of cross sectional area A and length l, having n turns per unit
length.
The magnetic field due to a current I flowing in the solenoid is B = μ0 n I ½
The total flux linked with the solenoid is
𝑁𝛷𝐵 = (𝑛𝑙)(𝜇0 𝑛𝑙)(𝐴)
𝑁𝛷𝐵 = 𝜇0 𝑛2 𝐴𝑙𝐼
𝐿𝐼 = 𝜇0 𝑛2 𝐴𝑙𝐼
𝐿 = 𝜇0 𝑛2 𝐴𝑙
½
Page 4 of 12
 𝐿 = 𝜇0 𝜇𝑟 𝑛2 𝐴𝑙 ½
b) The self-induced emf opposes any change in the current in the circuit
½
(OR) consequence of Lenz’s law.

[OR]
II X - Resistor ½
Y - Inductor ½
Z - Capacitor ½

From the phasor diagram

2 2
𝑣𝑚 = 𝑣𝑅𝑚 + (𝑣𝐶𝑚 + 𝑣𝐿𝑚 )2

𝑆𝑢𝑏𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑡𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑠𝑜𝑓 𝑣𝑅𝑚 , 𝑣𝐶𝑚 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑣𝐿𝑚

2
𝑣𝑚 = (𝑖𝑚 𝑅)2 + (𝑖𝑚 𝑋𝑐 + 𝑖𝑚 𝑋𝐿 )2
𝑣𝑚
𝑖𝑚 = 1
(𝑅 2 + [𝑋𝑐 − 𝑋𝐿 ])2 ½

By analogy to the resistance in a circuit, we introduce the impedance Z in an ac

circuit
𝑣𝑚
𝑖𝑚 =
𝑍
1
2
𝑍 = (𝑅 + [𝑋𝑐 − 𝑋𝐿 ])2 ½

27 a) 3
Stopping potential for cesium
𝑒𝑉0 = ℎ𝜗 − ℎ𝜗0 ½

6.63 × 10−34 (6.6 − 5.16) × 1014

𝑉0 = = 0.59 𝑣𝑜𝑙 ½
1.6 × 10−19
Saturation current
𝐼 = 𝑁 × 𝑒 = 50 × 1015 × 1.6 × 10−19 = 8 𝑚𝐴 ½

Page 5 of 12
 ½

b)

½
+
½

28 1 3

If an alternating voltage is applied across a diode in series with a load, a pulsating

voltage will appear across the load only during the half cycles of the ac input during
which the diode is forward biased. 1

SECTION ‘D’
29 I A) 2𝜋/ tan 𝜃 1 4
II C) Frequency 1
II B) Circular motion in x-y plane 1
IV i. C) 2R 1

Page 6 of 12
 [OR]
ii. D) Zero
30. I B) Yes they should have different refractive index. 1 4

II D) all the above 1

II A) then the refractive index of the liquid is equal to 1.47 1
IV i C) Doubles Same Same Becomes half 1
[OR]
ii. B) 3.9 f
SECTION ‘E’
31 I a) When r > R ½ 5

The electric field at each point of the Gaussian surface, therefore, has the same
magnitude
E and is along the radius vector at each point. Thus, 𝐸⃗ and ⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝑑𝑠 at every point
are parallel and the flux through each element is Eds.
Summing over all ds, the flux through the Gaussian surface is 𝐸 × 4 𝜋 𝑟 2 . ½
The charge enclosed is 𝜎 × 4 𝜋 𝑅 2
𝜎 × 4 𝜋 𝑅2
By Gauss’s law flux through the Gaussian surface is
𝜀0
𝜎 × 4𝜋𝑅 2 ½
2
∴𝐸 × 4𝜋𝑟 =
𝜀0
2
𝜎𝑅 𝑞 ½
𝐸 = =
𝜀0 𝑟 2 4 𝜋𝜀0 𝑟 2

When r < R

Gaussian surface does not enclose any charge so field inside the charged ½
surface is zero

Page 7 of 12
 b) 𝐹 = 𝐸𝑞
𝜎
𝐸=
𝜀0
𝜎 ½
𝐹 = 𝑞 𝑛𝑒𝑤𝑡𝑜𝑛
𝜀0
𝐷𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑙𝑒𝑓𝑡 𝑡𝑜 𝑟𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 ½
𝑂𝑢𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑠 𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑 𝑖𝑠 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜 𝑠𝑜 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑑𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐 ℎ𝑎𝑣𝑒 𝑛𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑛 𝑖𝑡 ½
𝐵𝑒𝑡𝑤𝑒𝑒𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑠 𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑 𝑟𝑒𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑒𝑠 𝑏𝑦 𝐾 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠. ½

[OR]
II a) Consider a dielectric inserted between the plates fully occupying the 5
intervening region.
The dielectric is polarised by the field and the effect is equivalent to two
charged sheets with surface charge densities σp and – σp.
The electric field in the dielectric then corresponds to the case when the net
surface charge density on the plates is ± ( σ– σp).
½
So the new field between the plates of the
𝜎−𝜎𝑝
∴𝐸= 𝜀0
½
so that the potential difference across the plates is
𝜎−𝜎𝑝
𝑉 = 𝐸𝑑 = 𝜀 𝑑
0 ½
For linear dielectrics 𝜎𝑝 is proportional to E0
𝜎
𝜎 − 𝜎𝑝 =
𝐾 ½
Where K is a constant characteristic of the dielectric. Clearly, K > 1.
𝜎𝑑
𝑉 ∴= 𝐾𝜀
0
𝑄
𝑊𝑒 know 𝜎 = 𝐴
𝑄𝑑
𝑉 = 𝐴𝐾𝜀
0
Then the capacitance C, with dielectric between the plates, is ½
𝑄
𝐶= 𝑉
𝜀0 𝐴
𝐶=𝐾 𝑑
𝐴
𝐴𝑠 𝐶0 = 𝜀0 𝑑
½
𝐶 = 𝐾𝐶0

b) 6𝐾𝜀0 𝐴 ½
𝐶𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑙𝑒𝑓𝑡 𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝐶1 =
𝑑
3𝐾𝜀0 𝐴 ½
𝐶𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝐶2 =
2𝑑
As the capacitors are in series
1 𝑑 2𝑑 5𝑑
= + = ½
𝐶𝑒𝑞𝑖 6𝐾𝜀0 𝐴 3𝐾𝜀0 𝐴 6𝐾𝜀0 𝐴
6𝐾𝜀0 𝐴 ½
∴ 𝐶𝑒𝑞𝑖 =
5𝑑

Page 8 of 12
32 I a) i. 5

In the quadrilateral AQNR ∠𝐴 + ∠𝑄𝑁𝑅 = 1800 ½

In the triangle QNR 𝑟1 + 𝑟2 = ∠𝐴 ½
𝛿 is the exterior angle of the triangle MQR 𝛿 = 𝑒 − 𝑟2 + 𝑖 − 𝑟1 ½
𝛿 =𝑒+𝑖−𝐴
ii.
1

b)

The incident ray makes normal incident on the first interface AB and travel
un-deviated parallel to the base. ½
The angle of incident on the second interface AC is 600
1
sin 𝑖𝑐 =
√2
𝑖𝑐 = 450 ½
At the second interface the light undergoes total internal reflection.
The reflected ray makes normal incidence on the base of the prism travels
back to the first medium with a deviation of 900. ½

[OR]
II a) 𝑌1 = 𝑎 cos 𝜔𝑡
𝑌2 = 𝑎 cos(𝜔𝑡 + ∅)
𝑌 = 𝑎 cos 𝜔𝑡 + 𝑎 cos(𝜔𝑡 + ∅)
∅ ∅
𝑌 = 2𝑎 cos cos (𝜔𝑡 + ) ½
2 2

Page 9 of 12
 ∅
𝑌 = 𝐴 cos (𝜔𝑡 + ) ½
2
∅
𝐴 = 2𝑎 cos , 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑢𝑙𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒 ½
2
2∅
i. 𝐼 = 4𝐼0 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 ½
1
ii. 𝐼 = 4𝐼0 2 = 2𝐼0

b) Light waves coming out from two independent sources of light will not have 1
any fixed phase relationship and would be incoherent
c) When the path difference = λ and 𝐼0 is the intensity of the each interfering 1
waves then the intensity of light at a point on the screen is 𝑘 = 4𝐼0 ½

When path difference = λ/3’ phase difference is 1200

½
Hence the intensity of light at a point where path difference λ/3 is
120
𝐼 = 𝑘𝑐𝑜𝑠 2
2 ½
𝑘
𝐼 = 𝑘𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 60 =
4 ½
33 I a) 5
1

Working:- ½
The coil is mechanically rotated in the uniform magnetic field by some external
means. The rotation of the coil causes the magnetic flux through it to change, so an
emf is induced in the coil. The ends of the coil are connected to an external circuit
by means of slip rings and brushes.
The coil is mechanically rotated in the uniform magnetic field by some external
means. The rotation of the coil causes the magnetic flux through it to change, so an
emf is induced in the coil. The ends of the coil are connected to an external circuit ½
by means of slip rings and brushes.

When the coil is rotated with a constant angular speed ω, the angle θ between the
½
⃗ and the area vector 𝐴 of the coil at any instant t is θ = ω t.
magnetic field vector 𝐵
As a result, the effective area of the coil exposed to the magnetic field lines
changes with time.
The flux linked with the coil of N turns at any given time is ½
𝛷𝐵 = 𝑁𝐴𝐵 cos 𝜔𝑡
Differentiating both sides with respect to time and using Faradays laws
𝑖𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑒𝑜𝑢𝑠 𝑒𝑚𝑓 𝜀 = 𝑁𝐴𝐵𝜔 sin 𝜔𝑡
𝜀 = 𝜀0 sin 𝜔𝑡

Page 10 of 12
 𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑒𝑚𝑓 𝜀0 = 𝑁𝐴𝐵𝜔
b) 𝜀0 = 20 × 𝜋 × (8 × 10−2 )2 × 3 × 10−2 × 50 = 0.603 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 ½
𝜀𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 = 0 ½
𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.0603 𝑎𝑚𝑝 ½
0.0603 ½
𝑖𝑟𝑚𝑠 = = 0.426 𝑎𝑚𝑝
√2

[OR]
II a) 1 5

b) Let ∅ be the flux in each turn in the core at time ‘t’ due to current in
the primary when a voltage vp is applied to it. ½
Total flux linked with the secondary is NS∅. ( Mutual inductance)
Total flux linked with the primary is Np∅. ( Self-inductance)
Then the induced emf εs in the secondary is
𝑑
𝜀𝑠 = − (𝑁𝑠 ∅)
𝑑𝑡
When the secondary is open, no current is drawn from the
secondary ½
𝑑 𝑑
𝑣𝑠 = 𝜀𝑠 = − (𝑁𝑠 ∅) = −𝑁𝑠 ∅
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
The alternating flux ∅ also induces an emf, called back emf in the
primary.
𝑑
𝜀𝑃 = − (𝑁𝑃 ∅)
𝑑𝑡
But 𝜀𝑃 = 𝑣𝑃 , If this were not so, the primary current would be
infinite since the primary has zero resistance(as assumed). ½
𝑑 𝑑
𝑣𝑃 = 𝜀𝑃 = − (𝑁𝑃 ∅) = −𝑁𝑃 ∅
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
The ration of 𝑣𝑃 𝑡𝑜 𝑣𝑠 is given as ½
𝑣𝑃 𝑁𝑃
=
𝑣𝑠 𝑁𝑠

b) Resistance of the wire R=15 Ω ½

For 4000-220 V step-down transformer
Current in the line =800000/4000 = 200 A
½
Power loss = I2R = 200 ×200×15=1400 KW
For 40,000-220 V step down transformer
Current in the line =800000/40000 = 20 A
Power loss = I2R = 20 ×20×15=14 KW ½
The power could be saved is 1386 KW
½
Page 11 of 12
Page 12 of 12
 PRE-BOARD EXAM (2024-25)
SET-1
CLASS – XII
SUBJECT - PHYSICS
Maximum Marks: 70 TimeAllowed:3 hours
General Instructions

(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.

(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D
and Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning
based of 1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each,
Section C contains seven questions of three marks each, Section D contains two
case study-based questions of four marks each and Section E contains three long
answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one
question in Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in
Section D and all three questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of
the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
c = 3 x 108 m/s me = 9.1 x10-31 kg mp=1.7x10-27kg e = 1.6 x 10-19 C µ0=4π
-7 -34 -12
x 10 Tm𝑨− h=6.63 x10 J s ε0= 8.854 x10 𝑪𝟐𝑵−𝟏𝒎−𝟐 Avogadro’s number
= 6.023 X 𝟏𝟎 per gram mole
𝟐𝟑

[SECTION – A] (16x1=16 marks)

Q1. Given Fig. shows electric field lines in which an electric dipole is placed as shown.
Which of the following statement is correct.

_q +q
(a) The dipole will not experience any force
(b) The dipole will experience a force towards right
(c) The dipole will experience a force towards left
(d) The dipole will experience a force upwards.

Q2.Two parallel infinite line charges with linear charge density +ƛ C/m and –ƛ C/m are
placed at a distance of 2R in free space. What is the electric field midway between the
two line charges.
(a) Zero (b) 2ƛ/ π Ɛ0 R N/C (c) ) ƛ/ π Ɛ0 R N/C (d) ƛ/ 2π Ɛ0 R N/C

Q3.When a potential difference V is applied across a conductor at temperature T, the

drift velocity of the electrons is proportional to

(a)T (b) √T (c) V (d) √V

Q4.A circular loop of conducting wire of radius ҅a᾿ carries a steady current I. The ratio
of magnitudes of the magnetic field at a point along its axis at distances ‘2a’ and ‘3a’
from its centre is

(a) 2:1 (b) 2√2:1 (c) √2: 1 (b)3:√2

Q5.The voltage across a resistor, an inductor and a capacitor connected in series to an

a..c. source are 20 V, 15 V and 30 V respectively. The resultant voltage in the circuit is

(a)5 V (b) 20 V (c) 25 V (d) 65 V

Q6. Correct match of column I with column II is

Column -l (waves) Column -ll (use)

(1) Infra-red P . Mobile communication

(2) Radio Q . Human eye
(3) Light R . Radar system
(4) Microwave S . Green Houses

(a) 1-P, 2-R, 3-S, 4-Q (b) 1-S, 2-P, 3-O, 4-R

(c) 1-Q, 2-P, 3-S, 4-R (d) 1-S. 2-R, 3-P, 4-Q

Q7.The wavelength of an electromagnetic wave is 500 nm. It’s frequency in free space
is-

(a)6 x 1014Hz (b) 3 x 1014 Hz (c) 3 x 1012 Hz (d)9 x 1012 Hz

Q8. Pencil in a beaker filled with water seems bent due to –

(a) Reflection (b) Refraction

(c) Diffraction (d) Total Internal Reflection

Q9.A thin convex lens of glass (n=1.5) has focal length+10 cm is immersed in water
(n=1.33). The focal length of lens in water is –.

(a) 12cm (b) 20 cm (c) 40 cm (d) 48 cm

Q10.In young's double slit experiment the separation between the slits is halved and the
distance between the slits and screen is doubled.The fringe width –

(a)Unchanged (b) halved (c) doubled (d) quadrupled

Q11.The distance of closest approach of an alpha particle is d when it moves with kinetic
energy ‘K’ towards a nucleus. Another alpha particle is projected with higher energy such
that the new distance of the closest approach is d/2. What is the kinetic energy of
projection of the alpha particle in this case?

(a) K /2 K (c) 2 K (d) 4K

Q12. The p-n junction diode is connected to a battery of e.m.f. 5.5 V and external
resistance 5.1 kΩ. The barrier potential in the diode is 0.4 V. The current in the circuit
is

(a) 1A (b) 1 mA (c) 2 mA (d) 0.08 mA

For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and
other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the
options as given below.

a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of
Assertion.
b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of
Assertion.
c) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) If both Assertion and Reason are false.
Q13. Assertion (A): The impedance offered by an ideal inductor to the flow of direct
current is zero.
Reason(R) : The frequency of direct current is zero.

Q14. Assertion (A):The Lyman series of hydrogen atom gives spectral line of
wavelength 258 nm .
Reason (R): The Lyman series in hydrogen atom lies in ultra violet region.

Q15. Assertion (A): The binding energy per nucleon for nuclei with atomic mass A>120
decreases with A..
Reason (R): The nuclear force are weak for heavier nuclei.

Q16. Assertion (A): The de Broglie wave length of an electron is greater than proton,
when both are moving with same speed.
Reason (R): de Broglie's wavelength of a particle is directly proportional to its linear
momentum. .

[SECTION – B] (5x2=10 marks)

Q17. An alpha-particle and a proton are accelerated from rest by the same potential.
Find the ratio of their de-Broglie wavelengths.
Q18. For a plano-concave lens of radius of curvature 10 cm, the focal length in air is 25
cm. Find the refractive index of the material of the lens.
OR

Light from a point source in air falls on a spherical glass surface (n = 1.5 and radius
of curvature = 10 cm). The distance of the light source from the glass surface is 100
cm. At what position the image is formed?

Q19. A straight wire of length 4 m carrying a current of 0.5 A can be turned into either
a square or a circular loop of 2 turns, before placing it in a magnetic field of intensity
0.1 T. Which loop do you think will require less counter torque in order to hold it in a
position such that the axis of the loop is perpendicular to magnetic field. Justify your
answer.
 Q20. Using the curve for the binding energy per nucleon as a function of mass number
A, state clearly how the release of energy in the processes of nuclear fission and nuclear
fusion be explained.
Q21. Two wires have same resistance. One is made of copper and other manganin. If
they are equally thick which of the two must be longer.

[SECTION – C ] (07x3=21 marks)

Q22. Two semiconductor materials A and B shown are made by doping germanium crystal
with arsenic and indium respectively. The two are joined end to end and connected
with battery. (a) Will the junction be forward biased or reverse biased . justify (b)
Sketch the VI graph for this arrangement.

Q23. Find the expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor of plate area A
and plate separation d when (I) a dielectric slab of thickness t and (II) a metallic
slab of thickness t, where (t < d) are introduced one by one between the plates of
the capacitor. In which case would the capacitance be more and why?

Q24. (I) Draw a ray diagram for the formation of image by a Cassegrain telescope.
(II)Why these types of telescopes are preferred over refracting type telescopes.
(Write 2 points)
Q25. (a) Explain the formation of depletion layer and potential barrier in a p-n junction.
(b) In fig input waveform is converted into output waveform by device X. Name
the device and draw its circuit diagram.
Q26. In a moving coil galvanometer. Why is it necessary to use (i) a radial magnetic
field and (ii) a cylindrical soft iron core in a galvanometer? Write the expression
for current sensitivity of the galvanometer. Can a galvanometer as such be used for
measuring the current? Explain.

Q27. A light ray entering a right-angled prism undergoes refraction at the face AC as
shown in Fig. 1.

(I) What is the refractive index of the

material of the prism in Fig. 1?

(II) (a) If the side AC of the above prism is now surrounded by a liquid of
refractive index 2/√3 shown in Fig. 2, determine if the light ray continues to
graze along the interface AC or undergoes total internal reflection or
undergoes refraction into the liquid.

(b) Draw the ray diagram to represent the path followed by the incident ray with
the corresponding angle values.

(Given, 𝑠𝑖𝑛

Q28. (a) Define electric flux and write its SI unit.

(b) Using Gauss theorem, derive an expression for the electric field due to an
infinitely long straight wire of linear charge density λ .

OR
 (a) State Gauss theorem in electrostatics

(b) Use Gauss theorem to obtain the expression for the electric field due to a
uniformly charged infinite plane sheet of charge of surface charge density σ

[SECTION D]
Case Study Based Question (2x4=08marks)

Q29.:

A point charge q (moving with a velocity v and located at r at a given time t) in the
presence of both the electric field E and magnetic field B. The force on an electric
charge q due to both of them can be written as F = q [ E + v xB ] = Fef + Fmf It is
called Lorentz force.
(i). If the charge q is moving under a field, the force acting on the charge depends on
the magnitude of field as well as the velocity of the charge particle, what kind of field
is the charge moving in?
(a) Electric field (b) Magnetic field (c) Both electric and magnetic field perpendicular
to each other (d) None of these
(ii). The magnetic force acting on the charge ‘q’ placed in a magnetic field will vanish
if (a) if v is small (b) If v is perpendicular to B
(c) If v is parallel to B (d) None of these
(iii). If an electron of charge –e is moving along +X direction and magnetic field is
along +Z direction then the magnetic force acting on the electron will be along
(a) + X axis (b) - X axis (c) –Y axis (d) +Y axis
(iv). The vectors which are perpendicular to each other in the relation for magnetic
 force acting on a charge particle are
(a) F and v (b) F and B (c) v and B (d) Both (a) and (b)

OR

A particle moves in a region having a uniform magnetic field and a parallel, uniform
electric field. At some instant, the velocity of the particle is perpendicular to the field
direction. The path of the particle will be
(a) A straight line (b) A circle
(c) A helix with uniform pitch. (d) A helix with non-uniform pitch

Q30. It is the phenomenon of emission of electrons from a metallic surface when light of a
suitable frequency is incident on it. The emitted electrons are called photoelectrons.

Nearly all metals exhibit this effect with ultraviolet light but alkali metals like lithium,
sodium, potassium, cesium etc. show this effect even with visible light. It is an
instantaneous process i.e. photoelectrons are emitted as soon as the light is incident
on the metal surface. The number of photoelectrons emitted per second is directly
proportional to the intensity of the incident radiation. The maximum kinetic energy of
the photoelectrons emitted from a given metal surface is independent of the intensity
of the incident light and depends only on the frequency of the incident light. For a
given metal surface there is a certain minimum value of the frequency of the incident
light below which emission of photoelectrons does not occur.

(i) In a photoelectric experiment plate current is plotted against anode potential.

(a) A and B will have same intensities while B and C will have different
frequencies
(b)B and C will have different intensities while A and B will have different
frequencies
 (c) A and B will have different intensities while B and C will have equal
frequencies
(d) B and C will have equal intensities while A and B will have same frequencies.

(ii) Photoelectrons are emitted when a zinc plate is

(a)Heated (b) hammered

(c) Irradiated by ultraviolet light (d) subjected to a high pressure

(iii) The threshold frequency for photoelectric effect on sodium corresponds to a

wavelength of 500 nm.
Its work function is about

(a) 4x10−19J (b) 1 J (c) 2x10−19 J (d) 3x10−19J

(iv) The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted from a surface when photons
of energy 6 eV fall on it is 4 eV. The stopping potential is

(a) 2 V (b) 4 V (c) 6 V (d) 10 V

OR

The minimum energy required to remove an electron from a substance is called its

(a) work function (b) kinetic energy (c) stopping potential (d) potential energy

[SECTION E] (3X5=15)

Q31. (a) State the two Kirchhoff’s rules used in the analysis of electric circuits and explain
them.

(b) Two cells of emf E1 and E2 and internal resistances 𝑟1and 𝑟2 respectively are
connected in parallel as shown in the figure. Deduce the expression for :
 (i) equivalent emf of the combination.
(ii) equivalent internal resistance of the combination
(iii) potential difference between the points A and B.

OR

(a) Write two limitations of ohm’s law. Plot their I-V characteristics.

(b) A heating element connected across a battery of 100 V having an internal resistance
of 1 Ω draws an initial current of 10 A at room temperature 20.0 °C which settles after a
few seconds to a steady value. What is the power consumed by battery itself after the
steady temperature of 320.0 °C is attained? Temperature coefficient of resistance
averaged over the temperature range involved is
3.70 × 10–4 °C–1.

Q32. (a) State the working principle of an AC generator. With the help of a neat and labelled
diagram, explain its working and obtain the expression for the emf generated in the coil.

(b) An inductor L of reactance XL is connected in series with a bulb B to an ac source

as shown in the figure. Explain briefly how does the brightness of the bulb change

when

(i) number of turns of the inductor is reduced

(ii) an iron rod is inserted in the inductor.

OR

(a) With the help of a diagram, explain the principle of a device which changes a low ac
voltage into a high voltage . Deduce the expression for the ratio of secondary voltage to the
primary voltage in terms of the ratio of the number of turns of primary and secondary
winding. For an ideal transformer, obtain the ratio of primary and secondary currents in
terms of the ratio of the voltages in the secondary and primary coils.
 (b)Write any two sources of the energy losses which occur in actual transformers.

(c) A step-up transformer converts a low input voltage into a high output voltage. Does
it violate law of conservation of energy? Explain.

Q33. (a) State Huygens principle.

(b) A plane wavefront is incident obliquely from denser to a rarer medium. Draw suitable
Huygens construction for the same and hence deduce the Snell’s law of refraction
(c) Also show using the above that the frequency of the wave does not change with change
in the medium
OR

(a) Draw a labeled diagram of compound microscope when final image is formed at
least distance of distinct vision.

(b) A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of focal length 2.0 cm and
an eyepiece of focal length 6.25 cm separated by a distance of 15 cm. How far
from the objective should an object be placed in order to obtain the final image at
(a) the least distance of distinct vision (25 cm) and (b) infinity? What is the
magnifying power of the microscope in each case?
 PRE-BOARD EXAM (2024-25) SET-1
MARKING SCHEME
CLASS – XII
SUBJECT - PHYSICS
[SECTION – A] (16x1=16 marks)

Q.N. ANSWER MARKS

1 c 1

2 c 1

3 c 1

4 b 1

5 c 1

6 b 1

7 a 1

8 b 1

9 c 1

10 d 1

11 c 1

12 b 1

13 a 1

14 a 1

15 a 1

16 c 1

SECTION – B -5x2
17 ƛ=h/√2mqV ½

ƛp=h/√2mqV ½

ƛᵅ=h/√2x4mx2qV ½

on dividing Ans = 2√2 1/2

18 ½

½
OR

1
V=37.5cm
1/2

19 1

1/2

1/2
20 . Nuclear fission : Binding energy per nucleon is smaller for heavier nuclei than the 1

middle ones i.e. heavier nuclei are less stable. When a heavier nucleus splits into the

lighter nuclei, the B.E./nucleon changes (increases) from about 7.6 MeV to 8.4 MeV.

Greater binding energy of the product nuclei results in the liberation of energy. This is

what happens in nuclear fission which is the basis of the atom bomb.

Nuclear fusion : The binding energy per nucleon is small for light nuclei, i.e., they are

less stable. So when two light nuclei combine to form a heavier nucleus, the higher

binding energy per nucleon of the latter results in the release of energy.

21 R=ℓL/A ½

For same ‘R’ and ‘A’ , L∞ℓ 1

The manganin has greater resistivity, therefore manganin wire has greater length. 1/2

SECTION - C 7x3

22 For correct biasing (reverse bias). 1

For justification. 1

For correct VI graph. 1

23 ½

½
In case of metallic K=∞,therefore capacitance is greater in case of metallic slab

1/2

24 2

1
25 For correct explanation of depletion layer and potential barrier with diagram 1.5

for name of device ½

correct circuit. 1

26 It keeps the magnetic field line normal to the area vector of the coil (ii) The cylindrical ½

soft iron core, when placed inside the coil of a galvanometer, makes the magnetic field 1
stronger and radial in the space between it and pole pieces, such that whatever the

position of the rotation of the coil maybe, the magnetic field is always parallel to its
1
plane. Current sensitivity is defined as the deflection produced by the galvanometer when

unit current is passed through its coil. C.S. = φ/I = NBA/k radian/ampere It can only

detect current but cannot measure currents in the (mA/A) range. 1/2

27 (I) Since the light ray enters perpendicular to the face AB, the angle of incidence on face ½

AC will be 45° ,

So, Sin C = 1/n , S𝑖𝑛 45° = 1 /𝑛 , n = √2 ½

(II)

1/2
 1

28 Definition ½

SI unit ½

Derivation 2

OR

Theorem 1

Derivation 2

29 I (b) Magnetic field II (c) If v is parallel to B III (d) + Y axis 1

IV (d) Both (a) and (b) 1

OR IV (d)A helix with non-uniform pitch 1

30 I(D) II(C) III (A) IV(B) 0R IV (A) 4x1

31 I (a)Correct Statement 1

(b)

OR

31 OR 1+1

Correct explanation with graph

1
 1

32 Principle 1

Labelled Diagram 1

Working 1

a) On increasing turns, L and hence inductive reactance increases; so current decreases. 1

Glow of bulb decreases.

b) On inserting iron rod, L and hence inductive reactance increases; so current decreases. 1
Glow of bulb decreases OR

OR Principle 1

Derivation 1

Derivation 1

Any two energy losses 1

Correct explanation 1
33 (a) Each point of the wavefront is the source of secondary disturbance and the 1

wavelets emanating from these points spread out in all directions with the speed

of the wave. These wavelets emanating from the wavefront are usually referred

to as secondary wavelets and if we draw a common tangent to all these spheres,

we obtain the new position of the wavefront at a later time.

(b)

OR

2
1.5
1.5
 PRE – BOARD EXAM (2024-25)
SET-2
CLASS- 12
SUBJECT - PHYSICS

Time Allowed: 3 Hrs Maximum Marks: 70

General Instructions:
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based
of 1 mark Each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains
seven questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study - based questions of
four marks each And Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one
question in Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D
and all three Questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such
questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
I. c = 3 x 108 m/s
II. me = 9.1 x10 - 31 kg
III. mp = 1.7 x10- 27 kg
IV. e = 1.6 x 10 - 19 C
V. µ0 = 4π x 10 - 7 T m A-1
VI. h = 6.63 x10 - 34 J s
VII. ε0 = 8.854 x10 - 12C2N-1m-2
VIII. Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 1023 per gram mole
 Section A
1 Out of the following which one is not a property of field lines: [1]
a) Field lines are continuous curves without any breaks
b) Field lines start at positive charges and end at negative charges
c) Two field lines cannot cross each other
d) They form closed loops

2 Dimension of resistivity (or specific resistance) is: [1]

a) ML3 T −2 I −1

b) ML2 T −2 I −1

c) ML2 T −2 I −2

d) ML3 T −3 I −2

3 Two horizontal thin long parallel wires, separated by a distance r carry current I each [1]
in the same directions. The net magnetic field at a point midway between them, will
be
0 𝜇 𝐼
a) (2𝜋𝑟 ) vertically downward

b) zero
𝜇 𝐼
0
c) ( 𝜋𝑟 ) vertically downward

2𝜇0 I
d) ( ) vertically upward
r

4 The ratio of magnetic fields due to a small bar magnet in the end on position to the [1]
broad side on position is
a) 1 : 1
b) 1 : 4
c) 2 : 1
d) 1 : 2

5 In a coil of self - induction 5 H, the rate of change of current is 2 A s−1 . Then, [1]
e.m.f. induced in the coil is
a) 10V
 b) - 10 V
c) - 5 V
d) 5 V

6 For a medium with permittivityℰ and permeability 𝜇 , the velocity of light is given [1]
by:

𝜀
a) √𝜇

1
b)
√𝜇𝜀

c) √𝜇𝜀

𝜇
d) √ 𝜀

7 A microscope is focused on a mark. Then a glass slab of refractive index 1.5 and [1]
thickness 6 cm is placed on the mark. To get the mark again in focus the microscope
should be moved
a) 9 cm upward
b) 2 cm downward
c) 4 cm upward
d) 2 cm upward

8 For a concave mirror of focal length f , the minimum distance between the object [1]
and its real image is:
a) f
b) 2f
c) zero
d) 4f

9 Two waves of intensities I and 4I superpose. Then, the maximum and minimum [1]
intensities are
a) 9 I and I
b) 5 I and I
c) 9 I and 3 I
 d) 5 I and 3 I

10 The radius of nucleus is: [1]

a) not related to its mass number
b) inversely proportional to its mass number
c) proportional to its mass number
d) proportional to the cube root of its mass number

11 The binding energy per nucleon is almost constant for many nuclei. It shows that [1]
nuclear forces are
a) charge independent
b) short range in nature
c) attractive in nature
d) saturated in nature

12 At 0 K, the resistivity of an intrinsic semiconductor is: [1]

a) same as that at 0𝑜 C
b) zero
c) infinite
d) same as that at 300 K

13 Assertion: If a proton and an α - particle enter a uniform magnetic field [1]

perpendicularly with the same speed, the time period of revolution of α - particle is
double that of proton.
Reason: In a magnetic field, the period of revolution of a charged particle is directly
proportional to the mass of the particle and is inversely proportional to charge of
particle.
a) Assertion and reason both are correct statements and reason is correct explanation
for assertion.
b) Assertion and reason both are correct statements but reason is not correct
explanation for assertion.
c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is wrong statement.
d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is correct statement.

14 Assertion: In a simple microscope, the image formed is virtual, erect and magnified. [1]
 Reason: The object to be seen is held between the optical centre and focus of the
convex lens.
a) Assertion and reason both are correct statements and reason is correct explanation
for assertion.
b) Assertion and reason both are correct statements but reason is not correct
explanation for assertion.
c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is wrong statement.
d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is correct statement.

15 Assertion (A): Light from two coherent sources is reaching the screen. If the path [1]
3𝜆
difference at a point on the screen for yellow light is 2 , then the fringe at that point
will be coloured.
Reason (R): Two coherent source always have constant phase relationship.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
c) A is true but R is false.
d) A is false but R is true.

16 Assertion (A): The resistivity of a semiconductor decreases with temperature. [1]

Reason (R): As temperature increases, the electrons gain sufficient energy and jump
from valence band to conduction band.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
c) A is true but R is false.
d) A is false but R is true.

Section B
17 Define mutual inductance. Write its SI unit. Give two factors on which the [2]
coefficient of mutual inductance between a pair of coils depends.
18 Identify the electromagnetic waves whose wavelengths lie in the range. [2]
(i) 10−12 m <𝜆< 10 −9 m
(ii) 10−3 m <𝜆< 10 −1 m
Write one use of each.
19 Define wavefront of a travelling wave. Using Huygens principle, obtain the law of [2]
refraction at a plane interface when light passes from a denser to rarer medium.

OR
What is a wavefront? Using Huygens’ principle, explain reflection of a plane
wavefront from a surface and verify the laws of reflection.

20 Plot suitable graphs to show the variation of photoelectric current with the collector [2]
plate potential for the incident radiation of

(i) the same intensity but different frequencies𝜈1 , 𝜈2 and 𝜈3 ( 𝜈1 <𝜈2 <𝜈3 )
(ii) the same frequency but different intensities I1 , I 2 and I 3 (I 1 < I 2 < I 3 )

21 Draw energy band diagrams of n -type and p - type semiconductors at temperature T [2]
> 0K, depicting the donor and acceptor energy levels.
Section C
22 (i) Two electric field lines cannot cross each other. Also, they cannot form [3]
closed loops. Give reasons.
(ii) A particle of charge 2𝜇 C and mass 1.6 g is moving with a velocity 4 𝑖̂ ms −1
. At t = 0 the particle enters in a region having an electric field 𝐸⃗ (in NC −1 )
= 80 𝑖̂ + 60 𝑗̂ . Find the velocity of the particle at t = 5 s.

23 In the given circuit in the steady - state, obtain the expressions for [3]
(i) the potential drop
(ii) the charge and
(iii)the energy stored in the capacitor, C.

24 Draw a plot showing the variation of resistivity of a (i) conductor and (ii) [3]
semiconductor, with the increase in temperature. How does one explain this
behaviour in terms of number density of charge carriers and the relaxation time?
25 (i) Define current sensitivity of a galvanometer. Write its expression. [3]
(ii) A galvanometer has resistance G and shows full scale deflection for current I𝑔

a. How can it be converted into an ammeter to measure current up to I0

(I 0 > I 𝑔 )?

b. What is the effective resistance of this ammeter?

26 (i) The interference pattern is not observed in Young’s double slit experiment [3]
when the two sources S1 and S 2 are far apart. Explain.
(ii) Mention the conditions for the two sources to be coherent.
(iii)What is the effect on the interference pattern in a Young’s double slit
experiment, if the source of wavelength 𝝀 is replaced by another source of
wavelength 1.5 𝝀 , with the interference pattern still observable?

27 The work function of a metal is 2.31 eV. Photoelectric emission occurs when light of [3]
frequency 6.4× 10 14 Hz is incident on the metal surface. Calculate:
(i) the energy of the incident radiation,
(ii) the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electron and
(iii)the stopping potential of the surface.

OR
A proton is accelerated through a potential difference V. After acceleration, the de
Broglie wavelength associated with it is𝜆 . If the proton is replaced by an alpha
particle, then find the de Broglie wavelength associated with it if it were accelerated
through the same potential difference V. What will be the momentum of the alpha
particle?

28 With the help of a suitable diagram, describe briefly the two important processes [3]
involved in the formation of a p - njunction. Define the terms depletion region and
potential barrier.
Section D
Question No. 29 and 30 are based on the given text. [4]
Read the text carefully and answer the questions:
29
A charged particle moving in a magnetic field experiences a force that is
proportional to the strength of the magnetic field, the component of the velocity that
is perpendicular to the magnetic field and the charge of the particle.

This force is given by ⃗𝑭 = 𝒒(𝑣 × 𝐵 ⃗ ) where q is the electric charge of the particle, v
is the instantaneous velocity of the particle, and B is the magnetic field (in tesla).
The direction of force is determined by the rules of cross product of two vectors.
Force is perpendicular to both velocity and magnetic field. Its direction is givenas
𝑣×𝐵 ⃗ if qis positive and opposite of 𝑣 × 𝐵⃗ if qis negative.

The force is always perpendicular to both the velocity of the particle and the
magnetic field that created it. Because the magnetic force is always perpendicular to
the motion, the magnetic field can do no work on an isolated charge. It can only do
work indirectly, via the electric field generated by a changing magnetic field.

(i) When a magnetic field is applied on a stationary electron, it

a) moves in the direction of the field
b) remains stationary
c) moves perpendicular to the direction of the field
d) spins about its own axis

(ii) A proton is projected with a uniform velocity v along the axis of a current -
carrying solenoid, then
a) the proton will be accelerated along the axis
b) the proton will continue to move with velocity v along the axis
c) the proton moves along helical path
d) the proton path will be circular about the axis

(iii) A charged particle experiences magnetic force in the presence of magnetic field.
Which of the following statement is correct?
a) The particle is moving and magnetic field is parallel to velocity.
b) The particle is stationary and magnetic field is perpendicular.
c) The particle is moving and magnetic field is perpendicular to the velocity.
d) The particle is stationary and magnetic field is parallel.

(iv) A charge q moves with a velocity 2 ms−1 along x - axis in a uniform magnetic
⃗ = (𝑖̂ + 2𝑗̂ + 3𝑘̂)T , then charge will experience a force
field 𝐵

a) along - z axis
b) in z - y plane
c) along +z axis
d) along - y axis
OR
An electron is moving along positive x- axis in a magnetic field which is parallel to
the positive y- axis. In what direction will the magnetic force be acting on the
electron?
a) along -x axis
b) along -z axis
c) along +z axis
 d) along -y axis

30 Read the text carefully and answer the questions: In an a.c. circuit, values of [4]
voltage and current change every instant. Therefore, power of an a.c. circuit at any
instant is the product of instantaneous voltage (E) and instantaneous current (I). The
average power supplied to a pure resistance R over a complete cycle of a.c. is P
=𝐸𝑣 𝐼𝛾 . When circuit is inductive, average power per cycle is 𝐸𝑣 𝐼𝑣 cos𝜙

In an a.c. circuit, 600 mHinductor and a 50 𝜇 F capacitor are connected in series with
10 𝛺 resistance. The a.c. supply to the circuit is 230 V, 60 Hz.
(i) The average power transferred per cycle to resistance is
a) 10.42 W
b) 15.25 W
c) 15 W
d) 17.42 W
(ii) The average power transferred per cycle to the capacitor is
a) 15 W
b) 10.42 W
c) 17.42 W
d) zero
(iii) The total power transferred per cycle by all the three circuit elements is
a) 17.42 W
b) zero
c) 12.45 W
d) 10.45 W
(iv) The average power transferred per cycle to inductor is
 a) zero
b) 17.42 W
c) 25 W
d) 16.52 W
OR
The electrical energy spend in running the circuit for one hour is
a) 7.5× 10 5 Joule
b) 10× 10 3 Joule
c) 9.4× 10 3 Joule
d) 6.2× 10 4 Joule

Section E
31 (i) Define the capacitance of a capacitor. Obtain the expression for the capacitance [5]
of a parallel plate capacitor in vacuum in terms of plate area A and separation d
between the plates.
(ii) A slab of material of dielectric constant K has the same area as the plates of a
3𝑑
parallel plate capacitor but has a thickness 4 . Find the ratio of the capacitance
with dielectric inside it to its capacitance without the dielectric.

OR
(i) Derive an expression for the potential energy of an electric dipole in a uniform
electric field. Explain conditions for stable and unstable equilibrium.
(ii) Is the electrostatic potential necessarily zero at a point where the electric field
is zero? Give an example to support your answer.

32 (i) Draw a ray diagram showing refraction of a ray of light through a triangular [5]
glass prism. Hence, obtain the relation for the refractive index (𝜇 ) in terms of
angle of prism (A) and angle of minimum deviation (𝛿m ) .
(ii) The radii of curvature of the two surfaces of a concave lens are 20 cm each.
Find the refractive index of the material of the lens if its power is - 5.0 D.

OR
(i) Draw a ray diagram for the formation of the image of a point object by a thin
double convex lens having radii of curvatures R1 and R 2 and hence, derive
lens maker’s formula.
 (ii) Define power of a lens and give its SI unit. If a convex lens of length 50 cm is
placed in contact coaxially with a concave lens of focal length 20 cm, what is
the power of the combination?

33 (i) State the postulates of Bohr’s model of hydrogen atom and derive the [5]
expression for Bohr radius.
(ii) Find the ratio of the longest and the shortest wavelengths amongst the spectral
lines of Balmer series in the spectrum of hydrogen atom.

OR
(i) Draw the plot of binding energy per nucleon (BE/ A) as a function of mass
number A. Write two important conclusions that can be drawn regarding the
nature of nuclear force.
(ii) Use this graph to explain the release of energy in both the processes of nuclear
fusion and fission.
 MARKING SCHEME

XII - PHYSICS PB-1, EXAM. 2024-25

SET-2

Q.No. Answer Points Marks

1 (d) 1

2 (d) 1

3 (b) 1

4 (c) 1

5 (b) 1

6 (b) 1

7 (d) 1

8 (c) 1

9 (a) 1

10 (d) 1

11 (d) 1

12 (c) 1

13 (a) 1

14 (a) 1

15 (d) 1

16 (a) 1

17 Correct definition ½
Henry (H)
Correct two factors ½

½+½
18 Correct electromagnetic waves ½+½

Correct uses ½+½

19 Correct definition ½

Correct diagram ½

Correct derivation 1

OR

Correct definition ½

Correct diagram ½

Correct derivation 1

20 Correct graphs

1+1

21 Correct energy band diagrams 1+1

22 1. Correct explanations ½+½

2. a = qE/m
a = 2×10−6 (80^i+60j) /1.6×10−3 ½

v = u + at => v = 4 i + (10 i + 7.5 j)×10-2 × 5 ½

v = 4.5 i + 0.375 j
½

23 Net emf = 2V - V = V

Net resistance = 2 R + R = 3 R
 Current in the circuit, I = V/3R
Potential difference across BE = 2V – I x 2R = 4V/3
1. Potential difference across C = 4V/3 – V = V/3 1
2. Charge on the capacitor, Q = CV/3
½
3. Energy stored in the capacitor = ½ C(V/3)2 = CV2/18
½

24 (i) Correct graph 1

(ii) Correct graph 1

Correct explanations 1/2+1/2

25 1. Correct definition & expression of current sensitivity ½+½

2. Correct diagram & explanation
Correct expression of effective resistance of ammeter ½+1

26 1. Correct explanation 1
2. Correct conditions
3. Correct explanation 1

27 E = hv

= 6.63 ×10-34 × 6.4 × 1014 ½

= 4.24 ×10-19 J

= 2.65 eV

Kmax = E - ∅0

= 2.65 - 2.31 ½

= 0.34 eV ½

(iii) eVo=Kmax

Vo = 0.34 V

OR ½

λ = h/√2mqV ½
 λp = h/√2meV ½
λα = h

√2.4m.2eV

⇒ λα / λp= 1/2√2 ½
Since λ= h/p
½
∴ pα /pp=2√2

28 Correct diagram 1

Correct two important processes ½+½

Correct definitions ½+½

29 (i) (b) 1

(ii) (b) 1

(iii)(c) 1

(iv)(b) OR (b) 1

30 (i) (d) 1

(ii) (d) 1

(iii)(a) 1

(iv)(a) OR (d) 1

31 1. Correct definition 1
Correct derivation
2. Capacitance without dielectric 2
Co = ƐoA/d
Capacitance when filled with dielectric having thickness
C = ƐoA/(d-t+t/k)
 C = ƐoA/(d-3d/4+3d/4k) =4KƐoA/d(K+3) ½
Ratio C/Co = 4K/(K+3)

OR
½
1. Correct derivation
Correct explanation of stable and unstable equilibrium ½

2. No ½
Correct example with explanation

½ +1

32 1. Correct ray diagram 1

Correct derivation
2
2. Given; P = -5D
f = 100/-5 = -20 cm
Using Lens Maker’s formula; 1/f = (μ -1)(1/R1- 1/R2)
½
1/-20 = (μ -1)(1/-20- 1/20)
½
⇒ μ = 1.5
½
OR
½
1. Correct ray diagram
Correct derivation

2. Correct definition & SI unit 1

3. P = 1/f = 1/f1 + 1/f2
P = 1/0.5 + 1/- 0.2 = -3D 2

½+½

33 1. Correct statement of postulates 1½

Correct derivation
2. Shortest wavelength in Balmer series: 1½
1/λs = RH (1/nf2 – 1/ni2) ⇒ 1/λs = RH (1/22 – 1/∞2) = RH/4
Longest wavelength in Balmer series:
 1/λL = RH (1/nf2 – 1/ni2) ⇒ 1/λs = RH (1/22 – 1/32) = 5RH/36 1
⇒ Ratio λL /λs = 9/5
OR
½
1. Correct diagram
Correct two important conclusions ½
2. Correct explanations

1+1
 PRE-BOARD EXAM (2024-25)
CLASS-XII SET-III
SUBJECT: PHYSICS (042)
Maximum Marks: 70 Time Allowed: 3 hours
General Instructions
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based of 1
mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains seven questions
of three marks each, Section D contains two case study-based questions of four marks each and
Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one question in Section
B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all three questions in Section
E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary:
i. c = 3 x 108 m/s
ii. me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
iii. mp = 1.7 x10-27kg
iv. e = 1.6 x 10-19C
v. μ0 = 4π x 10-7 T m A-1
vi. h = 6.63 x10-34 J s
vii. ε0 = 8.854 x10-12
viii. Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 1023

SECTION-A

1 The electric field intensity at a distance ‘r’ from a uniformly charged plane charge sheet of 1
very large size is ‘E’. The intensity of electric field at a distance 2r will be
(a) E/4
(b) E/2
(c) E
(d) 2E
2 The energy required to rotate an electric dipole in a uniform electric field ‘E’ from the 1
position of stable equilibrium to unstable equilibrium will be
(a) Zero
(b) -pE
(c) pE
(d) 2Pe
3 Two household bulbs of 200W and 300W are joined in series across a household supply. The 1
total power consumed by them will be
(a) 100W
(b) 120W
(c) 250W
(d) 500W

1
4 The radius of wire making the circular loop is ‘R’. The magnetic field at the center ‘O’ of 1
circular loop of radius ‘r’ shown in figure will be
(a) Zero
𝜇0 𝐼
(b) 4𝑟
𝜇0 𝐼
(c) 2𝑟
𝜇0 𝐼
(d) 2𝜋𝑟

5 Which of the following is not true about dia-magnetic materials 1

(a) Their magnetic moment is independent of temperature
(b) They have no unpaired electrons
(c) Magnetic moment of each atom is non-zero
(d) None of the above
6 The induced current in the circular metallic loop due to current I(t) will be 1

(a) Clockwise
(b) Zero
(c) Anticlockwise
(d) Dependent on increase/decrease in I(t)
7 The phase difference between electric vector and magnetic vector of a plane electromagnetic 1
wave is
(a) Zero
(b) 900
(c) 1800
(d) Not a fixed value
8 The parameter of light that does not change when it goes from one medium to other is its ( 1
ignoring absorption)
(a) speed
(b) frequency
(c) wavelength
(d) Amplitude
9 A convex lens of focal length 60cm is cut into two equal parts of perpendicular to its 1
principal axis.The focal length of each part will be
(a) 60cm
(b) 30cm
(c) 120cm
(d) 15cm
10 The work function of a metal is 1.8eV. Photons of energy 3.2eV eject photoelectrons from it. 1
The stopping potential for the photoelectrons will be
(a) -5V
(b) -3.2V
(c) -1.8V
(d) -1.4V

2
11 As per the notion of de Broglie’s hypothesis the ground state of Hydrogen atom can 1
accommodate ‘n’ cycles of matter waves associated with the moving electron where ‘n’ must
be
(a) 1/4
(b) 1
(c) 4
(d) A very large finite number
12 Which of the following is NOT a limitation of Bohr’s atomic model 1
(a) Electron will radiate electromagnetic waves and falls into the nucleus finally
(b) De-excitation of electrons give rise to atomic spectra
(c) It is true for single electron systems only
(d) All the above
For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and other
labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the options as given
below.
A. If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of
Assertion.
B. If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of
Assertion.
C. If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
D. If both Assertion and Reason are false.
13 Assertion- In a nucleus force between a proton-proton pair is greater than the neutron- 1
neutron pair.
Reason- The nuclear radius is proportional to its mass number.
14 Assertion- If the velocity of alpha particles is doubled in the famous gold foil scattering 1
experiment the distance of closest approach with the target nuclei will decrease by 75%.
Reason- The total energy of the system shall be conserved.
15 Assertion- A full wave rectifier doubles the frequency of input AC fed to it. 1
Reason- Each half cycle is of input AC is able to drive atleast one of the diode to forward
bias.
16 Assertion- n-type semiconductors are more conducting than p-type semiconductors. 1
Reason- The total charge in depletion layer is zero.
SECTION-B
17 Charges of -2 µC and 2µC are kept at (–a,0,0) and (a,0,0) respectively. How much work is 2
needed to move a charge of 1 µC from (0,2,1) to ( 0,1,2).
18 Why power transmission is done at high voltage? 2
Shall the power factor of a power transmission line be high or low? Give reason to support
your answer.
19 Using de-Broglie’s hypothesis, explain with the help of a suitable diagram, Bohr’s second 2
postulate of quantization of energy levels in a hydrogen atom.
OR
The following graph shows the variation of photocurrent with potential of collector’s plate.

3
 (a) Which physical parameter is kept constant corresponding to all the curves? Give
reason.
(b) Arrange the frequencies (𝜈1 , 𝜈2 and 𝜈3 ) in ascending order with a suitable reason
to favour your answer.
20 Write Einstein’s photoelectric equation. Write three salient features observed in photoelectric 2
effect, which can be explained on the basis of the above equation.
21 If the diodes in the circuit given below are ideal calculate the potential drop in 6Ω resistor. 2

SECTION-C
22 Define internal resistance of a cell. The plot of the variation of potential difference across a 3
combination of three identical cells in series, versus current is shown along the question.
What is the emf and internal resistance of each cell?

23 Calculate the current drawn from the battery in the given network. Also calculate the 3
potential difference across 4 Ω resistance of network.

OR
Two metallic rods, each of length L, area of cross A1 and A2, having resistivity 𝜌1 and 𝜌2
respectively are connected in parallel across a d.c. battery. Obtain the expression for the
effective resistivity of this combination.
24 1 250
In a series LCR circuit L, C, R are given by 𝜋 𝐻, 𝜋 𝜇𝑓 and 40Ω respectively. Find the power 3
factor of the circuit. If the alternating voltage source is of 200V, 40Hz.
What will be the time delay between voltage maxima and current maxima?
Note:- tan-1(0.75)=370
25 a) Write the following radiations in ascending order in respect of their frequencies ; 3
X-rays, Microwaves, UV rays and radiowaves.
b) Draw a sketch of a plane electromagnetic wave propagating along the z-direction. Depict
clearly the directions of electric and magnetic fields varying sinusoidally with z.
26 State Huygen’s principle and use it to establish laws of refraction. 3
4
27 Show graphically the variation of potential energy of a pair of nucleons with their separation. 3
Mark the region where the force is (i) attractive (ii) repulsive.
Why heavy nuclei undergo nuclear fission while lighter nuclei fusion? Explain
28 Define ‘diffusion current (IDff)’ and ‘drift current (Id)’ in case of a p-n junction? 3
The barrier Potential of a p-n junction is 1V and its knee voltage is 4V. Draw the V-I
characteristics of this diode in forward bias if supply voltage can be varied from 0 to 5V.
SECTION-D
29 Case Study Based Question: Moving Coil Galvanometer 4
A moving coil galvanometer is a parent device that can be converted to a voltmeter or
ammeter. A suitable resistor is to be connected with it in appropriate combination. A
galvanometer of 100Ω and figure of merit 20µA div-1 has 50divisions on either side of zero.
(A) Even without modification the given galvanometer can be used as a voltmeter in
the range
(i) 0-20V
(ii) 0-5V
(iii) 0-1V
(iv) 0-0.1V
(B) If the given galvanometer is converted to an ammeter by the help of a suitably
chosen resistor such that the final resistance of the system is R’ the value of R’
must be
(i) Lesser than 100 Ω
(ii) Equal to 100 Ω
(iii) Much more than 100 Ω
(iv) Slightly above 100 Ω
(C) Which of the following statements is ‘TRUE’ for a galvanometer
(i) Its range as an ammeter can be decreased
(ii) Its voltage sensitivity is proportional to its current sensitivity
(iii) The magnetic pole pieces can be flat
(iv) Angular deflection is proportional to current
(D) The slope of I vs ϕ (ϕ = deflection) graph (I along X-axis) in case of a a moving
coil galvanometer gives
(i) Number of turns
(ii) Figure of merit
(iii) Voltage sensitivity
(iv) Current sensitivity
OR
A student wishes to measure a voltage in the range
0-5V using the given galvanometer. She/he must connect
(i) 4900Ω in series
(ii) 0.02Ω in parallel
(iii) 4900Ω in series
(iv) 0.02Ω in parallel
30 Case Study Based Question: Interference of Light 4
Superposition of light originating from sources having a constant phase difference (may be
zero also) give rise to maxima and minima on the screen. The two sources are emitting light
having amplitudes in the ratio of 3:4. The maxima and minima of screen has finite width that
is decided by the wavelength of light (λ), separation between the sources (d) and gap between
screen and plane of slits(D)
(A) The ratio of intensity at a maxima and minima shall be
(i) 4:3
(ii) 16:9
(iii) 49:1
(iv) 2:√3
5
 (B) The shape of the fringes formed on the screen are
(i) Linear
(ii) Hyperbolic
(iii) Parabolic
(iv) Circular
(C) The phase difference ‘ϕ’ between waves meeting at a point will cause a minima if ϕ
is equal to
𝜋
(i) 2
(ii) 𝜋
(iii) 2𝜋
(iv) Zero
(D) It is observed experimentally that a maxima on screen extends from y= a to y=b
(a<b) then choose the correct statement
𝑎+𝑏
(i) Intensity of light is maximum at
2
(ii) Intensity of light is same from y=a to y=b
(iii) Intensity of light increases gradually from y=a to y=b
𝑏−𝑎
(iv) Intensity of light will minimum at 2
OR
The angular width of maxima or minima will be given by
(i) λ/d
(ii) λ/D
(iii) D/λ
(iv) d/λ

SECTION-E
31 (I) a) State Gauss law. A rod of length ‘L’with line charge density λ is kept inside a cube of 5
side ‘a’ (L > 2a) such that electric flux through it is maximum. Determine the maximum
electric flux through the cube.
b) A charge Q is distributed between two concentric spherical shells of radii r and R
(r<R) such that their surface charge densities are equal. Calculate the electric potential at
their common center.

OR

(II) a) Find the expression for electric field at a point ‘r’ away from the center of a hollow
spherical charged shell ‘R’, if the total charge on it is ‘Q’.
b) Two charges +16µC and -9 µC are separated by a distance 1m. Find the position in the
line joining two charges where potential is zero.
32 (I) a) Two concentric circular loops of radius ‘r’ and ‘R’ are lying in a plane. If r<<R find 5
the mutual inductance of the system
b) In an ideal transformer the primary coil has 500 turns. The output is a bulb of 250V
and 100W. if current in primary coil is 1A. find the number of turns in secondary coil
and identify the type of transformer?

OR

(II) a) Explain briefly, with the help of a labelled diagram, the basic principle of the working
of an a.c. generator.
b) A 100-turn coil of area 0.1 m2 rotates at half a revolution per second. It is placed in a
magnetic field 0.01 T perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the coil. Calculate the
maximum voltage generated in the coil.
6
33 (I) a) Draw the ray diagram showing refraction of ray of light through a glass prism. Derive 5
the expression for the refractive index  of the material of prism in terms of the angle of
prism A and angle of minimum deviation m .
(b) A ray of light PQ enters an isosceles right angled prism ABC of refractive index 1.5 as
shown in figure.

(i) Trace the path of the ray through the prism.

(ii)What will be the effect on the path of the ray if the refractive index of the prism is 1.4?
OR
(a) Two thin lenses are placed coaxially in contact. Obtain the expression for the focal length
of this combination in terms of the focal lengths of the two lenses.
(b) A converging lens of refractive index 1.5 has a power of 12 D. When it is completely
immersed in a liquid, it behaves as a diverging lens of focal length 60 cm. Find the refractive
index of the liquid.

**************************************************************************************************

7
 PRE-BOARD EXAM 2024-25
Marking scheme SET-III
Class-12 Subject: PHYSICS (042)
1 C 1
2 D 1
3 B 1
4 A 1
5 C 1
6 B 1
7 A 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 D 1
11 B 1
12 A 1
13 D 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 B 1
17 ZERO ---------------------1/2 mark 2
The potential is same at both points
V = -2µC/4πε0(5+a2)1/2 -------------------1/2 mark
V’= -2µC/4πε0(5+a2)1/2--------------------1/2 mark
V-V’ = - W/q ------------------------1/2 mark
Work done is zero ----------------1/2 mark

(alternate way)
Correct Figure ------------------------------------------1/2 mark
Bisector plane is equipotential surface of dipole
--------------------1/2 mark
Work done to move a charge on equi-potential surface is zero
----------------------------1 mark
18 To reduce line loss of energy current shall be lower that is possible if voltage is 2
higher as power is constant. -------1mark
Power factor shall be high -------------------1/2 mark
Current will be low if cosϕ is high this
reduces line losses---------------------------------1/2 mark
19 Suitable diagram ½M 2
According to de Broglie’s hypothesis, λ = h/mv .......(i) ½M
According to de Broglie’s condition of stationary orbits, the stationary orbits are
those which contain complete de Broglie wavelength. 2πr = nλ ....(ii) ½ M
Substituting value of λ from (i) in (ii), we get 2πr = n(h/mv)
=> mvr = n(h/2π) ....(iii) ½M
This is Bohr’s postulate of quantisation of energy levels.
OR
(a) Intensity is constant ----------------1/2 mark
as saturation current is same for all cases -------1/2 mark
(b) υ1< υ2 < υ3 -------------------1/2 mark
stopping potential is more in magnitude for υ3 ------------1/2 mark
20 Einstein's photoelectric equation is Ek = hv –W ½M 2
Frequency law ½M
Intensity law ½M
No time lag law ½M
21 D1 is reverse biased so it doesn’t conduct ---------------1/2 mark 2
I= E/(R+r) -----------------------------------1/2 mark
I= 1.2A --------------------------------------1/2 mark
V= IR = 7.2V --------------------------------1/2 mark
22 Definition of internal resistance of cell ½M 3
V = E – Ir ½M
From graph, when I = 0 A, then V = 6 V and when I = 1 A then V = 0 V
Putting V = 6 V and I = 0 A in eq (i)
⇒E=6V ½M
E = E1 + E2 + E3
⇒ E1 = E2 = E3 = 2 V ½M
When I = 1 A, and V = 0 volt
From eq (i)
⇒r=6Ω ½M
r1 + r2 + r3 = 6 Ω
⇒ r1 = r2 = r3 = 2 Ω ½M
23 P/Q = R/S ½M 3
1 Ω and 2 Ω are in series and 2 Ω and 4 Ω are in series
R = (3X6)/ (3+6) = 2 Ω 1M
I = V/R = 4/2 = 2 A ½M
Potential difference across 4 Ω resistor is 8/3 V. 1M
OR
Resistances R1 and R2 of two given rods will be: R1=ρ1L/A1 and R2=ρ2L/A2 ½M
∴ Effective resistance of parallel combination
R=R1R2/(R1+R2) = (ρ1L/A1 × ρ2L/A2)/ (ρ1L/A1 + ρ2L/A2) ½M
⇒R=ρ1ρ2L/(ρ1A1+ρ2A2) ½M
Moreover, since length of both rods is same,
effective equivalent area A =(A1+A2) ½M
∴ Effective resistivity ρ=RA/L = ρ1ρ2(A1+A2)/ (ρ1A1+ρ2A2) 1M
24 XL = 80Ω --------------------------1/2 mark 3
Xc = 50 Ω ---------------------------1/2 mark
Z= 30 Ω -----------------------------1/2 mark
Cosϕ = R/Z = 4/5 -------------------------1/2 mark
t = ϕ/ω= --------------------1/2 mark
t= 370/ {2(1800)40}= 0.00257s -----------------------1/2 mark
25 a) Radiowaves < Microwaves< UV rays <X-rays 1M 3
b) Sketch of EM wave and electric and magnetic vector 2M
26 Correct statement ------------1.5mark 3
Proof of refraction laws---------------1.5 mark
(0.5 mark for figure & 1mark for proof)
27 Correct Graph ------------------------1 mark 3
Correct marking for attractive and repulsive force
------------------------------------------------1/2 +1/2 = 1mark
Correct explanation for fission and fusion ---------1/2+1/2 = 1mark
28 Correct definition ------------------------1+1=2 mark 3

-----------------------------1 mark
29 (A) (iv) (B) (i) (C) (iv) (D) (iii) or (iii) 1x4 = 4
30 (A) (iii) (B) (ii) (C) (ii) (D) (i) or (i) 1x4 = 4
31 a) Correct Satement -1 mark 5
Flux is maximum is rod is kept along body diagonal ------1 /2mark
Q= λL√3 ---------------------------1/2 mark
Φ = (λL√3)/ε0 ------------------------1/2 mark

b) Charge on inner sphere q= Qr2/ (R2 +r2) ------------1/2 mark

Potential at all points inside a charged metallic sphere are same
----------------------1/2 mark
V = V1 + V2 = k[q/r + (Q-q)/R] ---------------------1/2 mark
V = KQ(R+r)/(R2+r2) -----------------------------1 mark

OR
a) Correct derivation -------------------------- 3 mark
b) Diagram and equating the potential -----------1 mark
Correct calculation of position 16/25m or 9/25m --------1 mark
32 𝜇0 𝐼 5
a) B= 2𝑅 -------------------1/2 mark
𝜇 𝐼
Φ = BA = 2𝑅0
𝜋𝑟 2 -------------------1/2 mark
Φ = M I -------------------1/2 mark
𝜇
M= 2𝑅0 𝜋𝑟 2 -------------------1/2 mark
b) P (input) = P( output) ------------------1 mark
V (input) = 100V -------------------1/2 mark
Vs /Vp = Ns /Np -------------------1/2 mark
Ns = 125 -------------------1/2 mark
Transformer is a step up type. -------------------1/2 mark

OR
a) Diagram 1M
Principle of AC Generator ½M
Working of AC Generator ½M
2
b) Here, N=100, A=0.1m , v=0.5rps, B=0.01T, e0=?
e0 =NABω =NAB(2πv) 1M
=100×0.1×2×3.14×0.5 e0=0. 1M
33 Correct figure -------------------1 mark 5
Correct proof -------------------2 mark
i > C so TIR will occour
correct completion of figure -------------------1 mark

if refractive index is 1.4 ray will refract into air as critical angle will be
more than 450--------1 mark

OR
Correct figure and proof --------------1+1.5=2.5 mark
1 1 1
= (𝜇𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑠 − 1)(𝑅 − 𝑅 ) -----------------1/2 mark
𝑓 1 2
1 𝜇𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑠 1 1
= (𝜇 − 1) (𝑅 − 𝑅 ) -------1/2 mark
𝑓𝑚𝑒𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑚 𝑚𝑒𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑚 1 2

P= 1/f ----------------------------1/2 mark

𝜇𝑚𝑒𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑚 = 1.46 ----------------------1mark
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN
DELHI REGION
PRE-BOARD-1 2024-25
CLASS – 12
SUBJECT: PHYSICS
Max. Marks: 70 Time allotted: 3 hrs.
General instructions:
1. There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
2. This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and
Section E. All sections are compulsory.
3. Section A contains 16 questions (twelve MCQ and four Assertion-Reasoning) of one
mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains
seven questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study-based
questions of four marks each, and Section E contains three long answer questions
of five marks each.
4. There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided for one
question in Section B, one in Section C, one in each CBQ in Section D, and all three
questions in Section E. You must attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
5. Use of calculators is not allowed.
6. You may use the following values of physical constants wherever necessary

(a) c = 3 x 108 m/s

(b) me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
(c) mp = 1.7 x10-27 kg
(d) e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
(e) µ0 = 4π x 10-7 T mA-1
(f) h = 6.63 x10-34 J s
(g) ε0 = 8.854 x10-12C2N-1m-2

S.No. Question Marks

Section-A
1 Two-point charges placed in a medium of dielectric constant 3 are at a distance ‘r’ 1
between them and experience an electrostatic force ‘F’. The electrostatic force between
them in a vacuum at the same distance ‘r’ will be
(a) 3F (b) F
(c) F/2 (d) F/3
2 The universal property among all substances is 1
(a) Diamagnetism (b) Paramagnetism
(c) Ferromagnetism (d) Both (a) and (b)
3 The direction of magnetic field lines close to a straight conductor carrying current will 1
be
(a) Along the length of the conductor (b) Radially outward
(c) Circular in a plane perpendicular to (d) Helical
the conductor
4 The induced charge in electromagnetic induction is independent of 1

Page 1 of 7
 (a) Flux change (b) Time
(c) Coil resistance (d) Magnetic Field Strength
5 In a p-type semiconductor, the current conduction is due to 1
(a) Holes (b) Atoms
(c) Electrons (d) Protons
6 In a compound microscope, the images formed by the objective and the eyepiece are 1
respectively
(a) Virtual, real (b) Real, virtual
(c) Virtual, virtual (d) Real, Real
7 A 20V AC is applied to a circuit consisting of a resistance and a coil with negligible 1
resistance. If the voltage across the resistance is 12V, the voltage across the coil is
(a) 16V (b) 10V
(c) 8V (d) 6V
8 In an insulator, the forbidden energy gap between a valence band and a conduction 1
band is of the order of
(a) Equal to 3 eV (b) Less than 3 eV
(c) Greater than 3 eV (d) Both (a) and (b)
9 Two sources of monochromatic light are said to be coherent if light waves produced by 1
them have the same
(a) Frequency and constant phase (b) Frequency only
differences
(c) Amplitude only (d) Amplitude and same
wavelength
10 Electromagnetic waves transport 1
(a) Charge and momentum (b) Frequency and wavelength
(c) Energy and momentum (d) Wavelength and energy
11 If r1 and r2 are the radii of the atomic nuclei of mass numbers 4 and 32, respectively, 1
then the ratio (r1/r2) is
(a) 1:2 (b) 1:3
(c) 1:4 (d) 1:5
12 If the ground state ionisation energy of the H-atom is 13.6 eV, the energy required to 1
ionise a H-atom from the second excited state is
(a) 1.51 eV (b) 3.4 eV
(c) 13.6 eV (d) 12.1 eV
Assertion and Reason Type Questions
Directions: In each of the following questions, a statement of assertion (A) is followed
by a statement of reason (R). While answering questions, choose the correct one and
mark it as
(a) If both assertion (A) and reason (R) are true and reason (R) is the correct
explanation of the assertion (A).
(b) If both assertion (A) and reason (R) are true, but reason (R) is not the correct
explanation of the assertion (A).
(c) If assertion (A) is true and reason (R) is false.
(d) If both assertion (A) and reason (R) are false

13 Assertion : The electrostatic force between the plates of a charged isolated capacitor 1
decreases when dielectric fills whole space between plates.
Reason : The electric field between the plates of a charged isolated capacitance increases
when dielectric fills whole space between plates.
14 Assertion : In Lyman series, the ratio of minimum and maximum wavelength 1
is ¾.

Page 2 of 7
 Reason : Lyman series constitute spectral lines corresponding to transition
from higher energy to ground state of hydrogen atom.
15 Assertion: If the circuit is continuous, a large magnetic flux through a coil maintains a 1
current in the coil.
Reason: Only a change in magnetic flux will maintain an induced current in the coil.
16 Assertion: The kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted by a photosensitive surface 1
depends upon the intensity of the incident photon.
Reason: The ejection of electrons from the metallic surfaces is possible with the
frequency of incident photons below the threshold frequency.
Section-B
17 The relative magnetic permeabilities of the two magnetic materials, A and B, are 0.96 2
and 500, respectively. Which magnetic materials, A and B, are they?
18 Derive an expression for the drift velocity of free electrons in a conductor in terms of 2
relaxation time.
19 The self-inductance of a solenoid of 600 turns is 108 mH. Find the self-inductance of a 2
coil with 500 turns with the same length, radius, and medium.
OR
Calculate the current drawn by the primary of a transformer, which steps down 200V to
20V to operate a device of resistance 20 ohm. Assume the efficiency of the transformer
to be 80%.
20 The graph in Figure shows the variation of stopping potential with frequency v of the 2
incident radiation for two photosensitive metals, X and Y.

Which of the metals has a large threshold wavelength? Give reason.

21 How is forward biasing different from reverse biasing in a p-n junction diode? Justify 2
your answer.
Section-C
22 Two point electric charges of value q and 2q are kept at a distance d apart from each 3
other in air. A third charge Q is to be kept along the same line in such a way that the net
force acting on q and 2q is zero. Calculate the position of charge Q in terms of q and d.
23 A long straight wire in the horizontal plane carries a current of 50 A in north to south 3
direction. Give the magnitude and direction of magnetic field at a point 2.5 m east of the
wire.
OR
Using Ampere’s circuital law, obtain an expression for the magnetic field along the axis
of a solenoid of length l and having N number of turns and carrying current I.
24 Two monochromatic light rays are incident normally on the face AB of an isosceles right- 3
angled prism ABC. The refractive indices of the glass prism for the two rays ‘1’ and ‘2’
are respectively 1.35 and 1.45. Trace the path of these rays entering through the prism.

Page 3 of 7
25 In Young’s double-slit experiment, the slits are 0.5 mm apart, and interference is 3
observed on a screen placed at a distance of 100 cm from the slits. It is found that the
9th bright fringe is at a distance of 8.835 mm from the second dark fringe from the
centre of the fringe pattern. Find the wavelength of light used.
26 3
A graph below shows the variation of binding energy per nucleon with mass number
. In the graph, mark regions where nuclei are:
(a) Prone to fusion.
(b) Prone to fission.
(c) Give a reason for your marking.

27 The energy levels of an atom of element X are shown in the diagram. Which one of the 3
level transitions will result in the emission of photons of wavelength 620 nm? Support
your answer with mathematical calculations.

Page 4 of 7
28 With the help of a circuit diagram, explain how a p-n junction diode works as a full wave 3
rectifier. Draw its input and output waveform.

Section-D
29 An arrangement of two conductors separated by an insulating medium can be used to 4
store electric charge and electric energy. Such a system is called a capacitor. The more
charge a capacitor can store, the greater is its capacitance. Usually, a capacitor consists
of two capacitors having equal and opposite charge + Q and –Q. Hence, there is a
potential difference V between them. By the capacitance of a capacitor, we mean the
ratio of the charge Q to the potential difference V. By the charge on a capacitor we mean
only the charge Q on the positive plate. Total charge of the capacitor is Zero. The
capacitance of a capacitor is a constant and depends on geometric factors, such as the
shapes, sizes and relative positions of the two conductors, and the nature of the medium
between them. The unit of capacitance is Farad (F). But μF and pF are the more
convenient units commonly used. Capacitor consists of two long strips or metal foils,
separated by two long strips of dielectrics, rolled up into a small cylinder. Common
dielectric materials are plastics (such as polyestor and polycarbonates) and aluminium
oxide. Capacitors are widely used in television, computer, and other electric circuits.

(i) A parallel plate capacitor C has charge Q. The actual charge on its plates are:
(a) +Q, +Q (b) +Q/2, +Q/2
(c) +Q, -Q (d) +Q/2, -Q/2
(ii) A parallel plate capacitor is charged. If the plate are pulled apart,
(a) The capacitance increases (b) The potential difference
increases
(c) The total charge increase (d) The charge and the potential
difference remains the same

(iii) What is the value of capacitance of a capacitor if it has a charge of 9C and voltage
of 5V?
(a) 1.8F (b) 45F
(c) 8.1F (d) 4.5F

(iv). How to increase the capacity of the parallel plate capacitor?

(a) Decrease the area of the plate (b) Increase the area of the plate
(c) Increase the distance between the (d) Both (a) and (b)
plate
OR
(v). Energy is stored in a capacitor in the form of
(a) Magnetic energy (b) Light energy
(c) Heat energy (d) Electrostatic energy
30 Kartikay and Rahul were both creating a series of circular waves by jiggling their legs in 4
water. The waves formed a pattern similar to the diagram, as shown. Their friend,
Shubham, advised Kartikay and Rahul not to play with water for a long time. He then
observed beautiful patterns of ripples that became very colourful when his friend
Lakshay poured an oil drop on them. Lakshay, a 12th-standard student, had explained
the cause of colourful ripple patterns to Kartikay.

Page 5 of 7
 (i) Name the phenomenon involved in the activity
(a) Reflection (b) Refraction
(c) Interference (d) Polarisation

(ii) A surface over which an optical wave has a constant phase is called.
(a) Wave (b) Wavefront
(c) Elasticity (d) None of these

(iii) Which of the following is correct for light diverging from a point source?
(a) The intensity decreases in proportion (b) The wavefront is parabolic.
to the distance squared
(c) The intensity at the wavelength does (d) The intensity increases in
depend on the distance. proportion to the distance
squared

(iv) The phenomena which is not explained by Huygens’s construction of

(a) Wavefront (b) Diffraction
(c) Refraction (d) Origin of spectra
OR
(v) Huygens’s concept of secondary wave
(a) allows us to find the focal length of a (b) is a geometrical method to
thick lens find a wavefront
(c) is used to determine the velocity of (d) is used to explain polarisation
light

Section-E
31 (a)The graph shows a plot of terminal voltage ‘V’ versus the current ‘i’ of a given cell. 5

Calculate from the graph

(I) emf of the cell and. (ii) internal resistance of the cell.
(b) Write any two factors on which internal resistance of a cell depends.

OR
(a) Using Gauss’s law, derive an expression for the electric field at any point
outside a uniformly charged thin spherical shell of radius ‘R’ and charge density
𝜎 C/m2.
Page 6 of 7
 (b) Draw the field lines when the charge density of the spherical shell is (i) positive,
(ii) negative
(c) A uniformly charged conducting spherical shell of 2.5 m in diameter has a
surface charge density of 100 µC/m2. Calculate the total electric flux passing
through the spherical shell.
32 (a) With the help of a diagram, explain the principle and working of a moving coil 5
galvanometer.
(b) What is the importance of a radial magnetic field, and how is it produced?
OR
A device ‘X’ is connected to an AC source. 𝑉 = 𝑉0 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜔𝑡. The variation of voltage,
current and power in one cycle is shown in the following graph:

(a) Identify the device ‘X’.

(b) Which of the curves, A, B, and C, represent the voltage, current, and power consumed
by the circuit? Justify your answer.
(c) How does its impedance vary with the frequency of the AC source?
(d) Obtain an expression for the current in the circuit and its phase relation with AC
voltage.
33 (i) Calculate the radius of curvature of an equi-concave lens of refractive index 1.5 when 5
kept in a medium of refractive index 1.4 to have a power of -5D.

(ii) Draw a labelled ray diagram to show the formation of an image at the least distance
of vision in an astronomical telescope.

(iii) Using the data given below, state which of the given lenses you prefer to use as an
eyepiece and the objective to design a compound microscope.
Lens Power Aperture
A 20D 0.02m
B 10D 0.02m
C 10D 0.05m
D 1.0D 0.1m

OR

(i) When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from a distant source, a
bright spot is seen at the centre of the obstacle. Explain why?
(ii) If a diffraction pattern is observed using a beam of red light, then replacing the
red light with blue light will cause the diffraction bands to become broader.
Explain why?
(iii) How will you differentiate interference and diffraction through observation?

Page 7 of 7
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN
DELHI REGION
PRE-BOARD-1 2024-25
CLASS – 12
SUBJECT: PHYSICS
CLASS: XII SUBJ ECT: PHYSICS
M.M.-70 TIME:3 HOURS

General Instructions:
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQs and four Assertion Reasoning based of 1
mark each; Section B contains five questions of two marks each; Section C contains seven
questions of three marks each; Section D contains two case study-based questions of four marks
each, and Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided for one question in Section
B, one in Section C, one in each CBQ in Section D, and all three questions in Section E. You have to attempt
only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants wherever necessary
(a) c = 3 x 108 m/s
(b) me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
(c) mp = 1.7 x10-27 kg
(d) e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
(e) µ0 = 4π x 10-7 T mA-1
(f) h = 6.63 x10-34 J s
(g) ε0 = 8.854 x10-12C2N-1m-2
Section -A
1. A charge ‘q’ is placed at the centre of a room having cubical shape. Find the electric flux through each
wall of the room

𝑞 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞
(a)
6𝜀0
(b) 4𝜀 (c) 2𝜀 (d) 𝜀
0 0 0

2. In a moving coil galvanometer, the deflection (Φ) on the scale by a pointer attached to the spring is:
𝑁𝐴 𝑁 𝑁𝐴𝐵 𝑁𝐴𝐵
(a) ( 𝑘𝐵 ) 𝐼 (b) ( 𝑘𝐴𝐵 ) 𝐼 (c) ( )𝐼 (d) ( )
𝑘 𝑘𝐼

3. Two identical bar magnets are fixed with their centres at a distance d apart. A stationary charge Q is
placed at P in between the gap of the two magnets at a distance D from the centre O as shown in the
figure. The force on the charge Q is
 (a) zero
(b) directed along OP
(c) directed along PO
(d) directed perpendicular to the plane of the paper
4. In the given figure, the current from A to B in the straight wire is decreasing. The direction of
the induced current in the loop is A

(a) clockwise
(b) anticlockwise
(c) changing
(d) nothing can be said

5. Which of the following graphs represents the correct variation of inductive reactance XL with
frequency 𝑣?

6. If E and B denote electric and magnetic fields, respectively, which of the following is dimensionless?

7. Two thin lenses of focal lengths 20 cm and – 40 cm are held in contact. If an object is placed at
infinity, then the image will be formed by the combination at

(a) 10 cm
(b) 20 cm
 (c) 40 cm
(d) infinity

8. The refractive index of glass is 1.5 for light waves of wavelength 𝜆 = 6000 A0 in vacuum. Its
wavelength in glass is:
(a) 2000 Å
(b) 4000 Å
(c) 1000 Å
(d) 3000 Å

9. The adjoining figure indicates the energy levels of a certain atom; when the system moves from 2E
to E level, a photon of wavelength λ is emitted. The wavelength of the photon produced during its
transition from 4E/3 to E is:

(a) λ/3
(b) 3λ/4
(c) 4λ/3
(d) 3λ

10. The binding energies per nucleon for a deutron and an α-particle are x1 and x2, respectively. The
energy Q released in reaction 1H² + 1H² → 2He4 + Q is:
(a) 4 (x1 + x2)
(b) 4 (x1 – x2)
(c) 2 (x1 + x2)
(d) 4 (x2 – x1)

11. The mobility of conduction electrons is greater than that of holes since electrons
(a) are negatively charged.
(b) are lighter
(c) require smaller energy to move through the crystal lattice.
(d) Undergo a smaller number of collisions.

12. In p-type semiconductor, the conduction current is due to

(a) Holes
(b) Atoms
 (c) Electrons
(d) Protons

Directions: These questions consist of two statements, each printed as Assertion and Reason. While
answering these questions, you must choose any of the following four responses.
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and the Reason is a correct explanation of the
Assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are correct, then reason is not a correct explanation of
assertion.
(c) If the Assertion is correct but the Reason is incorrect.
(d) If both the Assertion and Reason are incorrect.

13. Assertion: If the distance between parallel plates of a capacitor is halved and the dielectric
constant is three times, then the capacitance becomes 6 times.
Reason: The capacity of the capacitor does not depend upon the nature of the dielectric material.

14. Assertion: Induced e.m.f. will always occur whenever there is a change in magnetic flux.
Reason: Current is always induced whenever there is a change in magnetic flux.

15. Assertion: Though the light of a single frequency (monochromatic) is incident on a metal, the
energies of emitted photoelectrons are different.
Reason: The energy of electrons emitted from inside the metal surface is lost in collision with the
other atoms in the metal.

16. Assertion: The minimum and maximum wavelength ratio is ¾ in the Lyman series.
Reason: Lyman series constitute spectral lines corresponding to the transition from higher energy
to the ground state of the hydrogen atom.

Section B
17. A potential difference of 6 V is applied across a conductor of length 0.12 m. Calculate the drift
velocity of electrons if the electron mobility is 5.6 × 10 -6 m² V-1 s -1.
18. Define magnetic field strength. Give its SI unit.
19. Will the current be induced if a square loop of conducting material is moved with a constant velocity
fully inside a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the field? Explain.
20. The de-Broglie wavelengths associated with an electron and proton are equal. Prove that the
electron's kinetic energy is greater than that of the proton.
21. What happens to the width of the depletion layer of a p-n junction when it is

(i)forward biased? (ii)reverse biased?

OR
Draw a labelled energy band diagram of a P-type and N-type semiconductor.

Section C
22. (a) What characteristic property of nuclear force explains the constancy of binding energy per
nucleon (BE/A) in the range of mass number ‘A’ lying 30 < A < 170?
(b) Show that the density of nucleus over a wide range of nuclei is constant independent of mass
number A.
23. a) Calculate the shortest wavelength of the spectral lines emitted in the Balmer series. (Rydberg
constant = 107m-1)
b) In which part of the electromagnetic spectrum all the wavelengths of the Balmer series fall?
OR
The total ground state energy of any hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV, then calculate:
(i) total energy, (ii) kinetic energy and (iii) potential energy in the first excited state?
24. (a) Draw the circuit diagram of a Full wave rectifier. Also, draw the input & Output waveforms.
(b) In half-wave rectification, what is the output frequency if the input frequency is 50 Hz? What is
the output frequency of a full-wave rectifier for the same input frequency?
25. Identify the constituent radiation of the Electromagnetic Spectrum, which
(i) is used to study crystal structure.
(ii) is absorbed by the Ozone layer in the atmosphere.
(iii)Mention one more application for each of this radiation
OR
Find the position of the image formed by the lens combination given in the figure.

26. State Huygens’s postulates of wave theory. Using this, verify the laws of refraction.
27. Using Ampere’s circuital law, obtain an expression for the magnetic field along the axis of a current
carrying solenoid of length l and having N number of turns.
28. Using Gauss’s law, derive an expression for electric field intensity due to an infinitely long, straight
wire of linear charge density λ C/m.

Section D
29. Total internal reflection is the phenomenon of light bouncing back into the same medium when light
travels from one medium to another. For total internal reflection to take place, light has to travel
from denser to rarer medium, and the angle of incidence has to be greater than the critical angle.
 Multiple internal reflections in diamonds, totally reflecting prisms, and mirages are some examples
of total internal reflection.
i) The refractive index of a material is √2 . What should be the value of the incident angle so that
the light undergoes total internal reflection?
A) ≥ 45° 𝐵) ≤ 45°
𝐶) >45° D) < 45°
ii) For a ray of light entering from glass to water, which of the following statements is true for the
critical angle
A) Maximum for red colour and minimum for violet colour
B) Maximum for violet colour and minimum for red colour
C) is independent of colour of incident light
D) Maximum for yellow colour
iii) What will be the value of the angle of reflection when the angle of incidence is equal to the
critical angle?
A) 30° B) 45°
B) 60° D) 90°

OR

What will be the speed of light in a medium whose critical angle is 30°?

A) 3×108 m/s B) 3×10 -8 m/s

C) 6×108 m/s D) 1.5×108 m/s

iv) As shown in the figure, Three rays 1,2 & 3 of different colours fall normally on one of the sides
of an isosceles right angle prism. The refractive index of the prism for these rays is 1.39, 1.47
and 1.52, respectively. Which of these waves will get internally reflected?

A) 1 & 2 B) 2 & 3
C) 1 & 3 D) only 2
30. The electrolytic cell is a simple device that maintains a steady current in an electric circuit. A cell has
two electrodes: positive (P) and negative (N). They are immersed in an electrolytic solution. Dipped
in the solution, the electrodes exchange charges with the electrolyte. When a source of emf ε is
𝜀
connected to an external resistance R, the voltage V ext across R is given by Vext = IR = R, where
𝑅+𝑟

‘r’ is the internal resistance of the source.

i) A current of 2 A flows through a 2 Ω resistor when connected across a battery. The same battery
supplies a current of 0.5 A when connected across a 9Ω resistor. The internal resistance of the
battery is
A) 1/3 Ω B) 3 Ω
C) 0.5 Ω D) 1 Ω
ii) Maximum current can be drawn from the cell when
A) R=∞ B) R= 0
C) R= r D) r= 0
OR
The maximum current that can be drawn from the cell is
𝜀 𝜀
A) I= 𝑅+𝑟 B) I= 𝑟
𝜀 𝑉
C) I= 𝑅 D) I= 𝑅+𝑟

iii) A battery has an emf of 4V and internal resistance r. When the battery is connected to an external
resistance of 2 Ω, a current of 1 A flows through the circuit. How much current will flow if the
terminals are directly connected?
A) 0 A B) 1 A
C) infinite D) 2 A
iv) For an open circuit, which of the following statements is true
A) ε = V B) ε > V
C) ε < V D) ε ≤ V
Section E
31. (a) A resistor of 200 Ω and a capacitor of 15.0 mF are connected in series to a 220 V, 50 Hz AC source.
(i) Calculate the current in the circuit;
(ii) Calculate the voltage (rms) across the resistor and the capacitor.
(iii) Is the algebraic sum of these voltages more than the source voltage? If yes, resolve the
paradox.

(b) In a series LR circuit, the inductive reactance (X L) is numerically equal to resistance(R) of a

resistor used. (i.e. XL=R) The power factor of the circuit is P1. When a capacitor with capacitance
(C) such that XL = XC is put in the circuit, the power factor becomes P2. Calculate P1/P2.
 OR
Explain, with the help of a diagram, the principle and the workings of a step-up transformer, and
ip vs N
= = s
obtain the expression for the transformer equation.
is vp Np
, where the symbols have their
usual meanings.
32. (a) What is a capacitor? Deduce an expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor fully
filled with dielectric medium between the plates.
(b) A parallel plate capacitor of plate area A and separation d is filled with dielectrics of dielectric
constant K1 and K2, as shown in the figure. Find the net capacitance of the capacitor.

OR
A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery. After some time, the battery is disconnected, and a
dielectric slab of dielectric constant K is inserted between the plates. What change will take place in
the following :
(i) Charge on the plates
(ii) the capacitance of the capacitor
(iii) potential difference between the plates
(iv) electric field intensity between the plates
(v) the energy stored in the capacitor? Justify your answer in each case.

33. (A) Draw a ray diagram to form an image using a compound microscope. Write the expression for
its magnifying power, when the image is formed at infinity.
(B) A compound microscope uses an objective lens of a focal length of 4 cm and an eyepiece lens of a
focal length of 10 cm. An object is placed at 6 cm from the objective lens. Calculate the magnifying power
of the compound microscope.
OR
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the two slits are 0.15 mm apart. The light emitted by the source has
a wavelength of 450 nm. The screen is 2 m away from the slits.
(i) Find the distance of the second bright fringe and the third dark fringe from the central maximum.
(ii) Find the fringe width.
(iii) What will happen to the fringe width if the whole setup is immersed in water with a refractive index
of 4/3?
*****************************************************************************************************
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN:: HYDERABAD REGION

PRE BOARD QUESTION PAPER-1: 2024-25

SUBJECT: PHYSICS SET 1 CLASS: XII

TIME: 3Hrs MAX MARKS: 70

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

General Instructions

(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.

(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D
and Section E.

(3) All the sections are compulsory.

(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning
based of 1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C
contains seven questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study-
based questions of four marks each and Section E contains three long answer
questions of five marks each.

(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one
question in Section B, one question in Section C, all three questions in Section D and
one question in each CBQ in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in
such questions.

(6) Use of calculator is not allowed.

SECTION – A : Each question carries 1M

1 A steady current flows through a metallic wire whose area of cross-section (A)
increases continuously from one end of the wire to the other. The magnitude of drift
velocity (vd ) of the free electrons as a function of ‘A’ can be shown by

1
2 A straight wire is kept horizontally along east-west direction. If a steady current flows
in wire from east to west, the magnetic field at a point above the wire will point
towards:
a) East b) West
c) North d) South
3 The current in a coil of 15 mH increases uniformly from zero to 4 A in 0.004s. The emf
induced in the coil will be
a) 22.5 V b) 17.5 V
c)15.0 V d) 12.5 V
4 What is the ratio of the speed of infrared and ultraviolet rays in a vacuum?
a) 1:5 b) 2:1
c) 1:1 d) 0
5 An electromagnetic wave of frequency 3 MHz passes from vacuum into a medium with

dielectric constant k = 4 and μr = 1 Then

(a) both wavelength and frequency remain unchanged

(b) wavelength is doubled and frequency becomes half

(c) wavelength is halved and frequency remains unchanged

(d) wavelength is doubled and the frequency remains unchanged

6 Which of the following is a necessary condition for total internal reflection?
a) The angle of incidence in the denser medium must be greater than the critical angle
for the two media

b) The angle of incidence in the rarer medium must be greater than the critical angle
for the two media

c) The angle of incidence in the denser medium must be lesser than the critical angle
for the two media

d) The angle of reflection in the denser medium must be greater than the critical angle
for the two media

7 The fringe width in a Young’s double slit experiment is β. If the whole set-up is
immersed in a liquid of refractive index ‘µ’, then the new fringe width will be :
𝛽 𝛽
(a) β (b) β µ (c)µ d)µ2

8 When a metallic surface is illuminated with radiation of wavelength λ, the

2
 Stopping potential is V . If the same surface is illuminated with the radiation of

wavelength 2 λ then the stopping potential is V/4 . then find the threshold

wavelength of metallic surface

5
a) 3 λ b)2 𝜆 c)4λ d)5 λ

9 The slope of stopping potential versus frequency of incident light graph for a given

photo sensitive surface will be ( h = Planck’s constant)

(a) h (b) h/e (c) eh (d) e

10 An electron is released from rest in a region of uniform electric and magnetic fields
acting parallel to each other. The electron will:
(a) move in a straight line
(b) move in circle
(c) remain stationary
(d) move in a helical path
11
The power factor of LCR ac circuit at resonance is
(a) 0.5 (b)1 (c) √2 (d) zero

12 A metal ring is held horizontally and bar magnet is dropped through the ring with its
length along the axis of the ring. The acceleration of the falling magnet
(a) is equal to g
(b) is less than g
(c) is more than g
(d) depends on the diameter of ring and length of magnet
Assertion and Reasoning :
For questions 13–16, choose the correct option:
a) Both A and R are true, and R is the correct explanation of A.
b) Both A and R are true, but R is not the correct explanation of A.
c) A is true, but R is false.
d) A is false, but R is true.
13 Assertion: The total number of electric lines of force passing through a given area in a
normal direction is called electric flux.
Reason: Electric flux is a vector quantity.
14 Assertion: Gamma rays are used cancer therapy
Reason: Gamma rays are a type of high-energy radiation that can destroy or damage
cancer cells:

15 Assertion (A): A charge moving in magnetic field experiences a force.

Reason (R): Magnetic field is always associated with moving charge and the charge
will interacts with the external magnetic field.
3
16 Assertion(A): mutual inductance of two coaxial coils is proportional to the
length of the two coils
Reason( R ) : mutual inductance depend on angle between the axes of coils

SECTION – B : Each question carries 2M

17 (i) What is meant by Equi potential surface ?

(ii)what is the work done in moving a charge of + 1 nC in between two
points located on equi potential surface and are separated by a distance of
4 cm ?
(ii) Draw the Equi potential surface for an electric dipole
18
a) A very long straight wire carries a current I. At the instant when a charge
+Q at point P has velocity 𝑣⃗, as shown ,then find the direction of the
force on the charge ?

b) In order to pass 10% of the main current through a moving coil

galvanometer of 99 𝛺, the find the resistance of the required shunt ?

19 (a)State Huygens principle.

(b) Consider a plane wave front incident on a thin convex lens. Draw a
proper diagram to show how the incident wave front traverses through the
lens and after refraction focuses on the focal point of the lens, giving the
shape of the emergent wave front.
(OR)
How will the interference pattern in Young's double-slit experiment be
affected if,
(i) The screen is moved away from the plane of the slits.

(ii) The source slit is moved away from the plane of the slits.

20 (a)Two lines, A and B, in the plot given below show the variation of de-
Broglie wavelength, λ versus 1/√V, Where V is the accelerating potential

4
 difference, for two particles carrying the same charge. Which one of two
represents a particle of smaller mass ? Justify your answer

(b) Define stopping potential ? For a particular frequency of incident light ,

if intensity doubles, then will the stopping potential increases or
decreases or remains same ? Justify your answer
21 Define critical angle and derive the relation between critical angle and
refractive index

SECTION – C : Each question carries 3M

22 Five identical horizontal square metal plates each of area A are placed at a
distance d apart in air and connected to the terminals A and B as shown in
the figures (a) and (b). Find the effective capacitance between the two
terminals A and B in each figure

(OR)

(a)Derive the expression for potential at a point due to an electric dipole.

(b) A charge ‘q’ is moved from a point A above a dipole of dipole movement
‘p’ to a point B below the dipole in equatorial plane without acceleration.
Find the work done in the process.

5
23 (a)The figure shows the variation of intensity of magnetisation versus the
applied magnetic field intensity, H, for two magnetic materials A and B :

Identify the materials A and B.

(b) A circular coil of N turns and diameter ‘d’ carries a current ‘I’. It is
unwound and rewound to make another coil of diameter ‘2d’, current I
remaining the same. Calculate the ratio of the magnetic moments of the
new coil and the original coil.
24 (a) explain the working of transformer with necessary theory and diagram

(b)A transformer is used to light a 100W and 110V lamp from 200V mains. If

the main current is 1 A , the find the efficiency of the transformer

25 (a)The power of a thin lens is +5D. When it is immersed in a liquid, it

behaves like a concave lens of focal length 100 cm. Calculate the refractive
index of the liquid. Given refractive index of glass = 1.5.

(b) The optical density of turpentine is higher than that of water while its
mass density is lower shows a layer of turpentine floating over water in a
container.

6
 For which one of the four rays incident on turpentine in the path shown is
correct? And Justify your answer.

26 a) A parallel beam of light of wavelength 500 nm falls on a narrow slit and

the resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 1 m away. It is
observed that the first minimum is at a distance of 2.5 mm from the centre
of the screen. Find the width of the slit.

(b) write any two differences between fringe pattern in interference and
diffraction?

27 (a) The figure shows a plot of three curves a, b, c, showing the variation of
photocurrent vs collector plate potential for three different intensities I1,
I2 and I3 having frequencies v1, v2 and v3 respectively incident on a
photosensitive surface

Point out the two curves for which the incident radiations have same
frequency but different intensities. And substantiate your answer .

(b) A proton and an electron have same kinetic energy. Which one has
smaller de-Broglie wavelength and why?

28 (a)State Kirchhoff’s laws in electricity

(b) With a neat circuit diagram , Derive the expression for the balanced
condition of Wheatstone bridge

SECTION – D : Each question carries 4M

29 Rutherford’s Nuclear Model of Atom Rutherford in 1911, performed some

scattering experiments in which he bombarded thin foils of metals like gold,
silver, platinum or copper with a beam of fast moving α -particles. The thin
gold foil had a circular fluorescent zinc sulphide screen around it. Whenever
α-particles struck the screen, a tiny flash of light was produced at that point.

7
The important observations are: (i) Most of the α -particles passed through
the foil without undergoing any deflection, (ii) A few α -particles underwent
deflection through small angles. (iii) Very few mere deflected back i.e.,
through an angle of nearly 180°.

Conclusions: (i) Since most of the α -particles passed through the foil without
undergoing any deflection, there must be sufficient empty space within the
atom. (ii) A small fraction of α -particles was deflected by small angles. The
positive charge has to be concentrated in a very small volume that repelled
and deflected a few positively charged α -particles. This very small portion of
the atom was called nucleus. (iii) The volume of nucleus is very small as
compared to total volume of atom..

i) How did the actual results of the gold foil experiment differ from the
expected results?
a)There was no difference between the expected and actual results.
b) Rutherford expected particles to travel through the atoms, but instead,
they ricocheted and rebounded in unexpected directions.
c)The alpha particles caused the gold foil to undergo nuclear fusion instead o
fission.
d)None of these answers are correct.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ii) If an α-particle collides head-on with a nucleus, what is its impact

parameter?
a) Zero b) Infinite c) 10-10 m d) 1010 m

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

iii) An α-particle of energy 5 MeV is scattered through 180o by a fixed uranium

nucleus. Calculate the order of distance of the closest approach?
a) 10-20cm
b) 10-12cm

8
 c) 10-11cm
d) 1012cm

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

iv) Why was very thin gold foil used in an alpha scattering experiment?

a) To minimize effects of multiple scattering, i.e. scattering the alpha particle

on many atoms, because Rutherford wanted ultimately to measure the
deflection by a single atom.

b) Gold is a ductile material and it can be used to prepare thin sheets or foils

c) In case of thin foil , the value of impact parameter and distance of closest
approach will be maximum
d) If we use a thin foil , then alpha particle will easily penetrate through it and
It is easy to observe the scintillations when the alpha particle strikes the ZnS
Screen ( Fluorescent screen )

(OR)

Why gold was used to prepare the foil in Rutherford experiment shown
above?
a) It's the most malleable b) Gold is a conductor of electricity
c) Melting point of gold is low d) Gold is one of the densest metals

30
Whenever an electric current is passed through a conductor, it becomes hot
after some time. The phenomenon of the production of heat in a resistor by
the flow of an electric current through it is called heating effect of current or
Joule heating. Thus, the electrical energy supplied by the source of e .m. f is
converted into heat. In purely resistive circuit, the energy expended by the
source entirely appears as heat. But if the circuit has an active element like a
motor, then a part of energy supplied by the source goes to do useful work
and the rest appears as heat. Joule’s law of heating forms the basis of
various electrical appliances such as electric bulb, electric furnace, electric
press etc.

(i) Which of the following is correct statement?

(a) Heat produced in a conductor is independent of the current flowing.

(b) Heat produced in a conductor varies inversely as the current flowing.

(c) Heat produced in a conductor varies directly as the square of the current
flowing.

9
 (d) Heat produced in a conductor varies inversely as the square of the current
flowing

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(ii) If the coil of a heater is cut to half, what would happen to heat produced?
(a) Doubled (b) Halved (c) Remains same (d) Becomes four times.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iii) A 25 W and 100 W are joined in series and connected to the mains.
Which bulb will glow brighter?
(a) 25 W (b) 100 W
(c) Both bulbs will glow brighter (d) None will glow brighter
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iv) A rigid container with thermally insulated wall contains a coil of
resistance 100 Ω, carrying 1 A. Change in its internal energy after 5 min will be

(a) 0 kJ (b) 10 kJ
(c) 20 kJ (d) 30 kJ
(OR)
The heat emitted by a bulb of 100 W in 1 min is
(a) 36000 J (b) 1000 J (c) 600 J (d) 6000 J

SECTION – E : Each question carries 5M

31 (i)A dielectric slab of dielectric constant ‘K’ and thickness ‘t <d’ is inserted
between plates of a parallel plate capacitor of plate separation d and plate
area A. Obtain an expression for its capacitance.

(ii)Two capacitors of different capacitances are connected first (1) in series

and then (2) in parallel across a dc source of 100 V. If the total energy
stored in the combination in the two cases are 40 mJ and 250 mJ
respectively, find the capacitance of the capacitors.

(OR)

(i)Using Gauss’s law, show that the electric field 𝐸⃗⃗ at a point due to a
𝜎
uniformly charged infinite plane sheet, is given by 𝐸⃗⃗ = 2𝜖 𝑛^ where symbols
0
have their ususal meanings.
(ii)Electric field 𝐸⃗⃗ in a region is given by 𝐸⃗⃗ = (5x2 + 2) ^𝑖 where E is in N/C and
x is in metres. A cube of side 10 cm is placed in the region as shown in
figure.

10
 Calculate
(1) the electric flux through the cube, and
(2) the net charge enclosed by the cube.
32 (i)You are given three circuit elements X, Y and Z. They are connected one
by one across a given ac source. It is found that V and I are in phase for
𝜋 𝜋
element X. V leads I by ( 4 ) for element Y while I leads V by ( 4 ) for element Z.
Identify elements X, Y and Z.

(ii)Establish the expression for impedance of circuit when elements X, Y

and Z are connected in series to an ac source. Show the variation of current
in the circuit with the frequency of the applied ac source.

(iii) In a LCR-circuit, the potential difference between the terminals of the

inductance is 60 V, between terminals of the capacitor is 30 V and that
between the terminals of the resistance is 40 V. Then find the supply
voltage ?
(OR)
(i)Explain with the help of a labelled diagram, the principle and working of
an ac generator and obtain expression for the emf generated in the coil.

(ii) Draw a schematic diagram showing the nature of the alternating emf
generated by the rotating coil in the magnetic field during one cycle.

33 a)A ray is incident on a prism of material of refractive index 2 at point M

such that it grazes along NC after emerging from the prism, as shown in the
figure. then find (i) the critical angle for the prism. (ii) the angle of refraction
at face AB.

11
b) With the help of a ray diagram, show the formation of image of a point
object by refraction of light at a spherical surface separating two media of
refractive indices n1 and n2 (n2 > n1) respectively. Using this diagram, derive
the relation between n2, n1, the object distance u, image distance v and
radius of curvature R.
(OR)

(a)(i)Draw a labelled ray diagram of a compound microscope when image is

formed at least distance of distinct vision.

(ii)Define its magnifying power and deduce the expression for the
magnifying power of the microscope.
(iii)A compound microscope has a magnifying power of 100 when the image
is formed at infinity. The objective has a focal length of 0.5 cm and the tube
length is 6.5cm. Find the focal length of the eyepiece

12
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN: HYDERABAD REGION

FIRST PRE-BOARD EXAMINATION: 2024-25

SUBJECT: PHYSICS SET 2 CLASS: XII

TIME: 3Hrs MAX MARKS: 70

General Instructions:

(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.

(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E.
All these sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion- Reasoning based of 1
mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains seven
questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study based questions of four
marks each and Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one question in
Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all three
questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(6) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary.

1. C = 3 x 108 m/s 2. me=9.1x10-31 kg

3. e=1.6x10-19C 4. µ0=4πx10-7Tm/A

5 .h=6.63x10-34Js 6. ε0=8.854x10-12𝐶2/𝑁 𝑚2

2. 7. Avogadro’s number=6.023X1023gram per mole

SECTION –A

1. 1) Current sensitivity of a galvanometer can be increased by decreasing:

(a) Magnetic field B (b) number of turns N (c) Torsional constant K (d) Area A

2. Choose the correct statement.

(a) A capacitor can conduct a dc circuit but not an inductor.
(b) In a dc circuit the inductor can conduct but not a capacitor.
(c) In dc circuit both the inductor and capacitor cannot conduct.
(d) The inductor has infinite resistance in a dc circuit.

3. Electromagnetic waves are produced by

a) constant electric field b) constant magnetic field
c)changing electric and magnetic field d) constant electric and magnetic field

4. A ray of light travels from glass (refractive index=1.5) to air (refractive index=1). If the critical
angle is 42∘, the angle of deviation for an angle of incidence of 50∘ will be:

a)60.0∘ b)22.0∘ c)45.0∘ d) 80.0∘

5. In the phenomena of Diffraction of light when the violet light is used in the experiment issued
instead of red light then,
a) Fringe width increases b) No change in fridge width
c)Fringe width decreases d) Colour pattern is formed

6.The work function of a metal is independent of

(i) nature of the surface of the metal (ii) dimensions of the metal
(iii) properties of the metal (iv) abundance of the metal
(a) (i) only (b) (i) and (iii) (c) (ii) and (iii) (d) (ii) and (iv)

7. The Balmer series for the H-atom can be observed

(a) if we measure the frequencies of light emitted when an excited atom falls to the ground
state.
(b)if we measure the frequencies of light emitted due to transitions between excited states
and the first excited state.
(c) in any transition in a H-atom.
(d) as a sequence of frequencies with the lower frequencies getting closely packed.

8.Consider a system of three charges q/3, q/3 and –2q/3 placed at points A, B and C respectively
as shown in the figure. Take O to be the centre of the circle of radius R and angle CAB = 60º

(a) The electric field at point A is q2/8πε0R2

(b) The magnitude of the force between the charges at C and
B is q2/54π ε0R2
(c) The potential energy of the system is zero
(d) The electric field at point B is q 2/12π ε0R

9.A conductor of 10 Ω is connected across a 6 V ideal source. The power supplied by the source
to the conductor is:

(a) 1.8 W (b) 2.4 W (c) 3.6 W (d) 7.2 W

10.In a LCR-circuit, the potential difference between the terminals of the inductance is 60 V,
between terminals of the capacitor is 30 V and that between the terminals of the resistance is 40
V. The supply voltage will be

(a) 25 V (b) 50 V (c) 100 V (d) 200 V

11 . The Bohr model for the spectra of a H-atom
(a) will be applicable to hydrogen in the molecular from.
(b) will not be applicable as it is for a He-atom.
(c) is valid only at room temperature.
(d) predicts continuous as well as discrete spectral lines.

12. Electromagnetic waves with wavelength λ are used by a FM radio station for broadcasting.
Here λ belongs to
(a) radio waves (b) VHF radio waves
(c) UHF radio waves (d) microwaves

For Question 13 to 16, two statements are given – one labeled as Assertion (A) and other labelled
Reason(R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the options as given below:

A. Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of Assertion.
B. Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is Not the correct explanation of Assertion.
C. Assertion is true but Reason is false.
D. Both Assertion and Reason are false.

13. Assertion(A): The resistance of a given mass of copper wire is inversely proportional to the
square of length.
Reason(R): When a copper wire of a given mass is stressed to increase its length, its cross-
sectional area also increases.
14. Assertion(A): Microwaves are considered suitable for radar systems.
Reason(R): Microwaves are of shorter wavelength.

15. Assertion(A): A charge moving in magnetic field experiences a force.

Reason (R): Magnetic field is always associated with moving charge which interacts
with the external magnetic field.

16. Assertion (A): The coils of a spring come close to each other, when current is passed through it.
Reason (R): It is because, the coils of a spring carry current in the same direction and hence
attract each other.
SECTION – B

17. Draw the circuit diagram of a Wheat Stone bridge. Obtain the condition when no current flows
through the galvanometer in it.
18. Write Einstein’s photoelectric equation and point out any two characteristic properties of
photons on which this equation is based.
19. Both, the electric and magnetic fields can deflect a moving electron. What is the difference
between these deflections?
20. Derive an expression for the radius of nth Bohr’s orbit in Hydrogen atom.
OR
Energy of electron in first excited state in Hydrogen atom is -3.4eV. Find KE and PE of electron in
the ground state
 21. The ratio of maximum and minimum intensities of two sources is 4:1. Find the ratio of
their amplitudes.
SECTION – C

22. Dhruv took three capacitors namely C1 , C2 & C3 having capacitances 3μF , 4 μF and 2 μF and
placed C1 in series with the parallel combination of C 2 & C3 . He applied a potential difference VAB
of +1200V across C1 and grounded the end point C of the parallel combination .
(i) Draw the required circuit diagram.

(ii) Evaluate the charge on each capacitor

(iii) ( iii)Find the potential at B

23. (I ) A uniform magnetic field gets modified as shown below when two specimens X and Y are
placed in it. Identify whether specimens X and Y are diamagnetic, paramagnetic or ferromagnetic

(ii)How is the magnetic permeability of specimen X different from that of specimen Y?

24. Draw a ray diagram showing the image formation by a compound microscope. Hence obtain
expression for total magnification when the image is formed at infinity.

25 ( a) An electric dipole is kept first to the left and then to the

right of a negatively charged infinite plane sheet having a
uniform surface charge density. The arrows p1 and p2 show the
directions of its electric dipole moment in the two cases. Identify
for each case, whether the dipole is in stable or unstable
equilibrium. Justify each

(b) Next, the dipole is kept in a similar way (as shown), near
an infinitely long straight wire having uniform negative linear
charge density. Will the dipole be in equilibrium at these two
positions? Justify your answer.

26. A resistor of 30 Ω and a capacitor of 250/π µF are connected in series to a 200V, 50Hz ac
source. Calculate (i) the current in the circuit, and (ii) voltage drops across the resistor and the
capacitor. (iii) Is the algebraic sum of these voltages more than the source voltage? If yes, solve
the paradox.

(OR)

A series LCR circuit with R= 20 Ω, L= 2 H and C=50 F are connected to a 200 volts ac source of
variable frequency. What is
 (i) the amplitude of the current,
(ii) the average power transferred to the circuit in one complete cycle, at resonance?
(iii) Calculate the potential drop across the capacitor.
27.A square loop of side 20 cm carrying current of 1 A kept near an infinite long straight wire
carrying a current of 2 A in the same plane as shown in the figure. Calculate the magnitude and
direction of the net force exerted on the loop due to the current carrying conductor.

2A
10 cm

1A 20 cm

28. The intensity at the central maxima (O) in a Young’s double slit experiment is I0. If the
distance OP equals one-third of the fringe width of the pattern, show that the intensity at point
P would be I0/4.

SECTION – D

29 . In 1905, Albert Einstein explained the photoelectric effect, a phenomenon observed when
light strikes a metal surface and ejects electrons. According to Einstein, light behaves as particles
called photons, each having an energy of hν, where h is Planck's constant and ν is the frequency
of light. For electrons to be ejected from the surface of the metal, the energy of the photons
must exceed a certain minimum value known as the work function (Ф) of the metal. If the
frequency of the incident light is less than the threshold frequency (ν0), no photoelectric
emission occurs regardless of the intensity of the light. This challenged the classical wave theory
of light, which could not explain why the emission depended on frequency rather than intensity.

1. Which of the following parameters determines whether photoelectric emission occurs?

a) Intensity of light b)Threshold frequency
c) Wavelength of light d) Angle of incidence

2. If the frequency of light is increased while keeping the intensity constant,which of the
following increases in the photoelectric effect?
a) Number of emitted electrons b) Energy of emitted electrons
b) Work function d)Threshold frequency

3. What does the photoelectric effect demonstrate about the nature of light?
a) Wave-like nature b)Particle-like nature
 b) Dual nature d) Corpuscular theory

4. Which law of classical physics was contradicted by the results of the photoelectric
effect experiment?
a) Newton's second law b)Maxwell's equations.
c) Law of conservation of energy d) Wave theory of light
(OR)
4. If the frequency of incident light is doubled, how is the energy of the photons affected?
a) Doubled b) Halved c) Quadrupled D) Unchanged

30. In electrostatics, electric flux is the measure of the electric field through a given surface,
although an electric field in itself cannot flow. It is a way of describing the electric field
strength at any distance from the charge causing the field. Now, consider a cube of each edge
0.30 m is placed with its one corner at the origin. The cube is placed in a non-uniform electric
field.

(i) The surfaces that have zero electric flux are

(a) S1 and S2 (b) S1 and S6 (c) S2 and S4 (d) S1 and S3
(ii) Electric flux passing through surface S1 is
(a) –0.27 Nm2C–1 (b) 0.27 Nm2C–1 (c) –0.18 Nm2C–1 (d) 0.18 Nm2C–1

(iii) Electric flux passing through surface S4 is

(a) –0.18 Nm2C–1

(b) +0.18 Nm2C–1
(c) +0.27 Nm2C–1
(d) zero
(iv) Total net flux passing through the cube if N/C

(a) Zero (b) –0.18 Nm2C–1 (c) 0.18 Nm2C–1 (d) 0.27 Nm2C–1
 (OR)

(v) Total charge enclose inside the cube is

(a) 0 (b)-1.62 pC (c)+1.62 pC (d )2.4 pC

SECTION –E

31. i) What is the principle of a capacitor?

ii) Derive the equation for capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with a dielectric slab

iii) What type of energy is stored between the two plates of a charged capacitor?

(OR)
i) Derive the equation for potential at any point due to a short dipole.

ii) Mention any two properties of equipotential surface.

32 A straight conductor PQ of resistance R is moving in a uniform and time dependent magnetic

field as shown in the given figure.

Find:
a.(i) the emf induced across the rod PQ.
(ii) force on the movable arm PQ.
(iii) The power delivered by the external force to maintain the motion of movable arm PQ. 3M

b.In a coil of area 20 𝑐𝑚2 and 10 turns with magnetic field directed perpendicular to the plane
changing at the rate of 103 T/s. The resistance of the coil is 20 ohm. What will be the current of the
coil? 2M
(OR)
(a) Calculate self-inductance for a long solenoid of length l, number of turns N and radius r.

(b) A coil is mechanically rotated with constant angular speed ω in a uniform magnetic field which is
perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the coil. The plane of the coil is initially held perpendicular to
the field. Plot a graph showing variation of (i) magnetic flux (Ф) and (ii) the induced emf in the coil as a
function of ωt.

33. A thin convex lens having two surfaces of radii of curvature R1 and R2 is made of a material of
refractive index μ2. It is kept in a medium of refractive index μ1. Derive, with the help of a ray diagram,
the lens maker’s formula when a point object placed on the principal axis in front of the radius of
curvature R1 produces an image I on the other side of the lens.

OR
Draw a labeled ray diagram of an astronomical telescope for the near point adjustment.
Your are given three lenses of powers 0.5 D, 4 D, 10 D. State, with reason, which two lenses will
you select for constructing a good astronomical telescope.
Derive the expression for magnifying power when the final image is at infinity.
 केन्द्रीय तिद्यालय संगठन, कोलकािा संभाग
KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, KOLKATA REGION
प्री- बोडड परीक्षा / PRE-BOARD EXAMINATION – 2024-25
कक्षा / CLASS – XII अतिकिम अंक/MAX. MARKS – 70
तबषय/SUB. - PHYSICS समय/TIME – 03 घंटे/Hours

General Instructions
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based of 1 mark
each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains seven questions of
three marks each, Section D contains two case study-based questions of four marks each and
Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one question in
Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all three
questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
i. c = 3 x 108 m/s
ii. me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
iii. mp = 1.7 x10-27 kg

iv. e = 1.6 x 10-19 C

v. µ0 = 4π x 10-7 T m 𝑨−𝟏
vi. h = 6.63 x10-34 J s
vii. ε0 = 8.854 x10-12 𝑪𝟐𝑵−𝟏𝒎−𝟐
viii. Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟑 per gram mole

SECTION – A
1 The potential energy of an electric dipole placed in a uniform electric field is minimum when 1
the dipole is:
(a) Aligned with the field (b) Opposed to the field
(c) Makes an angle of 45° with the field (d) Makes an angle of 90° with the field
2 A charge is located at the centre of a cube . the electric flux through any two 1
consecutive faces will be :
(a) (b) (c) (d) .
3 Four charges are kept inside a closed surface. What will be the 1
outgoing flux through the surface.
(a) 26 V-m (b) 0 V-m (c) 10 V-m (d) 8 V-m
4 In Nuclear reaction, there is conservation of 1
(a)Mass only (b) energy only
(c) momentum only (d)mass, energy and momentum
5 Which of the following graphs 1
represents the variation of resistivity ρ
with temperature T for copper?

6 Which of thejunction diodes shown below are forward biased? 1

7 A bulb is connected in series with an inductor and an alternating voltage source. The switch 1
is turned on and the bulb glows. If now an iron rod is inserted in the inductor. The
brightness of the bulb will
(a) Increase (b) decrease (c) remain same (d) cannot say

8 A charged particle is moving in a magnetic field ,leaves the field without any deflection 1
(a) The particle is positively charged
(b) the magnetic field is perpendicular to the direction of motion of the particle
(c) the magnetic field is parallel to the direction of motion of the particle
(d ) both (a) and (c)
9 In Young double slit Experiment with white source of light, if one slit is covered 1
with green filter and the other with red filter, what will be observed on the screen?
(a) Alternate red and green fringes
(b) Alternate bright and dark fringes
(c) No interference
(d) There shall be separate interference pattern for green and red
10 Which of the following is not due to total internal reflection? 1
(a) Working of optical fibre
(b) Difference between apparent and real depth of a pond
(c) Mirage on hot summer days
(d) Brilliance of diamond
11 A ray of light strikes a transparent rectangular slab of refractive index at an angle of 1
incidence of 45˚. The angle between the reflected and refracted rays is
(a) 75˚
(b) 90˚
(c) 105˚
(d)120˚
12 Which of the following is used to investigate the structure of solids? 1
(a) Gamma rays (b)infrared rays (c) X – rays (d)cosmic rays
Directions:
(a)Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is the correct explanation of the assertion
(b) Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion
(c)Assertion is correct, reason is incorrect
(d)Assertion and reason both incorrect
13 Assertion: The total energy of an electron revolving in any stationary orbit is negative. 1
Reason : Energy can have positive or negative values of energy.
14 Assertion: The kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted from a metal surface increases with 1
the increase in the frequency of the incident light.
Reason: According to Einstein’s photo electric equation ,the kinetic energy of photoelectrons
is directly proportional to the frequency of the incident light.
15 Assertion: For the fission of heavy nuclei, neutrons are more effective than protons. 1

Reason: Neutrons are heavier than protons .

16 Assertion: The magnetic field of an electromagnet can be increased by increasing the number 1
of turns.
Reason: The magnetic field is directly proportional to the number of turns.
SECTION – B
17 Define mobility of a charge carrier .Write the relation expressing mobility in terms of 2
relaxation time? Give it’s S.I unit.
18 A galvanometer coil of 50Ω resistance shows full scale deflection for a current of 5mA.How 2
will you convert this galvanometer into a voltmeter of range 0 to 15 V?
19 The ratio of the intensities at minima to the maxima in the Young’s double slit experiment is 2
9:25.Find the ratio of the widths of the two slits?
OR
Laser light of wavelength 630nm incident on a pair of slits produces an interference pattern
in which bright fringes are separated by 7.2mm.Calculate the wavelength of another source of
laser light which produces interference and bright fringes separated by 8.1mm using same
pair of slits.
20 (i)Define the term stopping potential. 2
(ii)Plot a graph showing the variation of photoelectric current as a function of anode potential
for two light beams of same intensity but of different frequencies and ( >
21 Draw a plot of binding energy per nucleon (BE/A)versus mass number(A) for a large number 2
of nuclei lying between . Using this graph , explain clearly how the energy is
released in both the process of nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
SECTION – C
22 (i)Draw a ray diagram for the formation of image by a Cassegrain telescope 3
(ii)Why these types of telescope are preferred over refracting type telescopes.

23 Draw the circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier using P – N junction diode. Explain its working 3
and show the output and input waveforms.
24 A ray PQ is incident normally on the face AB of a triangular prism of 3
angle of 600 made of a transparent material of refractive index as
shown in figure .Trace the path of the ray as it passes through the prism
.Also calculate the angle of emergence and angle of deviation.
25 State Gauss’s theorem in electrostatics .Using this theorem, derive an expression for the 3
electric field due to an infinitely long straight wire of linear charge density 𝛌.
OR
(i)Define electric flux and write its S.I unit.
(ii)Use Gauss’s law to obtain the expression for the electric field due to a uniformly charged
infinite plane sheet .
26 (i)Explain with the help of a diagram the formation of depletion region and barrier potential in 3
p – n junction.
(ii)How is forward biasing different from reverse biasing in a p-n junction diode(only 2 points)
27 A long straight wire of a circular cross-section of radius carries a steady current .The 3
current is uniformly distributed across the cross –section .Apply Ampere’s circuital law to
calculate the magnetic field at a point in the region for (i) (ii)
28 Find the expression for the capacitance of parallel late capacitor of plate area and plate 3
separation when (i)a dielectric slab of thickness t and (ii) a metallic slab of thickness t
,where are introduced one by one between the plates of the capacitor .In which case
would the capacitance be more and why?

SECTION – D
29 When a charged particle is moving with velocity in a region in which electric field 4
⃑ and magnetic field ⃑ , both are present, it experiences a force due to both the fields
simultaneously. This force is known as Lorentz force. When , ⃑ and ⃑ all are collinear, the
particle will follow a straight – line path with change in speed. When , ⃑ and ⃑ are
mutually perpendicular, the particle will pass through the field with same velocity without
any deviation in its path.

(i) The magnetic Lorentz force experienced by a charge , entering a magnetic field ⃑
with a velocity is
(a) √⃑ ⃑ (b) (⃑ × ) (c) q( . ⃑ ) (d) ( × ⃑ ) .
(ii) In a region, uniform electric and magnetic fields are present. These two fields are
parallel to each whet. A charged particle is released from rest in mid region. The path of
the particle will be
(a) circle (b) ellipse (c) helix (d) straight line
(iii) An electron travelling with velocity , enters a region of space in which electric and
magnetic fields exist. Then the electron goes undeflected for all values of fields
(a) if both electric and magnetic fields are normal to .
(b) if the magnetic field alone is normal to .
(c) if both electric and magnetic fields are parallel to .
(d) if the electric field alone is normal to .
(iv) An ion with a charge of × 10−19C is in a region where a uniform electric field of
5 × 104 V/m is perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field of 0.8 T. If its acceleration is zero,
then its speed must be
(a) 0 (b) 1.6 × 104 m/s (c) 4.0 × 104 m/s (d) 6.3 × 104 m/s
OR
The direction of magnetic force can be determined by
(a)Maxwell’s right hand thumb rule
(b)Fleming’s left hand rule
(c ) Maxwell’s left palm rule
(d) Fleming’s right hand rule
30 Photo electric effect: It is the phenomenon of emission of electrons from a metallic surface 4
when light of a suitable frequency is incident on it. The emitted electrons are called
photoelectrons.
Nearly all metals exhibit these effect with ultraviolet light but alkali metals like Lithium,
sodium, potassium, cesium ,etc .show this effect even with
visible light. It is an instantaneous process i.e
photoelectrons are emitted as soon as the light is incident
on the metal surface .The number of photoelectrons
emitted per sec is directly proportional to the intensity of
the incident radiation. The maximum kinetic energy of the
photoelectrons emitted from a given metal surface is independent of the intensity of the
incident light and depends only on the frequency of the incident light . For a given metal
surface there is a certain minimum value of the frequency of the incident light below which
emission of photoelectrons does not occur.

(i)In a photoelectric experiment plate current is plotted against anode potential

(a) A and B will have same intensities while B and C will have different frequencies
(b) B and C will have different intensities while A and B will have different frequencies
(c) A and B will have different intensities while B and C will have equal frequencies
(d) B and C will have equal intensities while A and B will have same frequencies.

(ii)Photo electrons are emitted when a zinc plate is

(a) Heated (b) hammered
(c) Irradiated by ultraviolet light (d) subjected to a high pressure
(iii)The threshold frequency for photoelectric effect on sodium corresponds to a
wavelengthof500nm.
Its work function is about
(a) 4x10−19J (b) 1J (c) 2x10−19J (d) 3x10−19J .
(iv)The maximum kinetic energy of photo electrons emitted from a surface when photons of
energy 6 eV fall on it is 4 eV. The stopping potential is

(a) 2V (b) 4V (c)6V (d) 10V

OR

The minimum energy required to remove an electron from a substance is

called its
(a) work function (b) kinetic energy (c) stopping potential (d) potential energy
SECTION – E
31 (i) Derive an expression for drift velocity of electrons in a conductor .Hence ,deduce Ohm’s 3+2
law.

(ii) A wire whose cross-sectional area is increasing linearly from one end to the other ,is
connected across of V volts .Which of the following quantity or quantities remain constant in
the wire ? Explain.

(a) Drift speed (b) current density (c) electric field.

 OR

(i) State Kirchhoff’s rules.

(ii) Using Kirchhoff’s rules to write the expression for the

currents I1, I2, I3 in the circuit shown in figure.

32 (i)Explain briefly, with the help of a labelled diagram, the basic principle of the working of an 5
a.c.generator.
(ii)In an a.c. generator, coil of N turns and area A is rotated at an angular velocity ω in a
uniform magnetic field B. Derive an expression for the instantaneous value of the emf
induced in coil.
(iii)What is the source of energy generation in this device?

OR
(i) With the help of a diagram, explain the principle of a device which changes a low ac
voltageinto a high voltage . Deduce the expression for the ratio of secondary voltage to the
primary voltage in terms of the ratio of the number of turns of primary and secondary
winding. For anideal transformer, obtain the ratio of primary and secondary currents in
terms of the ratio of the voltages in the secondary and primary coils.
(ii)Write any two sources of the energy losses which occur in actual transformers.
(iii) A step-up transformer converts a low input voltage into a high output voltage. Does it
violate law of conservation of energy? Explain.

33. (i) Draw a ray diagram to show the working of a compound microscope. Deduce an expression 3+2
for the total magnification when the final image is formed at the near point.

(ii) In a compound microscope, an object is placed at a distance of 1.5cm from the the
objective of focal length 1.25cm .If the eyepiece has a focal length of 5cm and the final image
is formed at the near point. Estimate the magnifying power of the microscope.

OR

𝟐 𝟏 𝟐 𝟏
(i) Obtain len’s maker formula using the expression =

Here, the ray of light propagating from a rarer medium of refractive index to a denser
medium of refractive index is incident on the convex side of spherical refracting surface of
radius of curvature R.

(ii) You are given three lenses L1 , L2 , L3 each of focal

length 10cm.An object is kept at 15 cm in front of L1 as
shown. The final image I is formed at the focus of L3.Find
the separation between L1,L2 and L3.
 MARKING SCHEME
1 a
2 d
3 b
4 d
5 c
6 a
7 b
8 d
9 c
10 b
11 C
12 C
13 b
14 a
15 b
16 a
17 Correct definition……………………..1/2
Mobility µ= = ……………………..1
Unit ………………………..1/2
18 R= -G= -50=2950Ω……………..
2950 Ω is to be connected in series with galvanometer to convert it into a desired
voltmeter……………………………………..1/2
19 =

= …………………………….1/2
= ……………………………………..1/2
= ……………………………………..1/2
Ratio of widths of the slit = = ……………….1/2
OR

= ………………………………………….1/2

= × = × m ………….1/2
=708.75 m =708.75nm ……………..1

20 Correct definition………………..1
Correct graph……………………….1
21 Correct graph……………………….1
Correct explanation ……………..1
22 Correct diagram …………………………1
Two points …………………………………2
23 Correct circuit diagram……………….1
Explanation of working………………..1
Input and output waveforms………1
24

A=600 i=00…………………………………………………………………1/2
At the interface AB
=
r=00………………………………………………………………………………………….1/2
At the intergace AC
=
× …………………………………………………………………………1/2
e= ………………………………………………………………………………….1/2
angle of deviation=300………………………………………………………………1

25 Correct statement………………………1
𝛌 ……………………………………..1/2
…………………………………..1/2

E×2πrl= ……………………………………………………….1/2
E= ………………………………………………………….1/2
OR
Correct definition………………………………………….1/2
Unit ………………………………………1/2

2×E∫dS= …………………………………………………….1/2
E×2A= ……………………………………………………………1/2
E=
E= ……………………………………………………………….1/2
E= ……………………………………………………………..1/2
26 Diagram………………………………………………………………………………………………………1/2
Explanation of formation of depletion region and barrier potential …………….
Any two differences……………………………………………………………………………………………1
27

For
Current passes through the cross-section of radius r is = ×
……………………………..1/2
B∫dl= ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
1/2

B×2πr= × …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
..1/2
B= ×r
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………1/2

For
B∫dl=
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………1/2
B×2πr=
B=
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..1/2
28 For dielectric
C= ……………………………….1
For metallic slab
C= …………………………………..1
In second case capacitance will be more……..1/2
Correct reason…………………………………………….1/2
29 i)d
ii)d
iii)c
iv)d
OR
iv)b
30 i)d
 ii)c
iii)a
iv)b
OR
iv)a
31 i)Electric field produced inside the wire is E=V/l
Force on an electron a=-eE …………………………………………1/2
Acceleration of each electron =-eE/m…………………………..1/2
Drift velocity =-eEτ/m…………………………………………………….1
Current in the conductor I=neA ………………………………………………………1/2
I=
I=VR…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..1/2
ii) Electric field remains constant which is equal to V/l.
current density and hence drift speed change……………….2
OR
i)correct statements……………………………………………………..2
ii) I3= I1+ I2………………………………1/2
for loop 1
4 I1-3 I2 =-1……………………………………..1/2
For loop 2
3 I2+2 I3=3 …………………………………1/2
I1=2/13A………………………………………1/2
I2 =7/13A……………………………………..1/2
I3=9/13A………………………………………1/2

32 i)Correct diagram…………………1
principle of working of ac generator……..2
ii)correct expression…………………1
iii)mechanical energy of rotation of armature coil………………1
OR
i)correct diagram ………………1
principle of transformer…………1/2
correct expression = ………….1/2
For ideal transformer ,input power=output power………1/2
= ………………………………………………1/2
ii)any two sources of energy losses………….1
iii)correct explanation ……………………………….1

33 (i)Correct diagram…………………1
m= = = × …………1
m =- (1+ ) ………………………1
(ii) = - ,
=7.5cm ………………1
m=-30……………………..1

OR
(i)Correct diagram and derivation…………3 marks
(ii) = - for lens L1
V=30cm…………………………..1/2 marks
for lens L3 ,object distance infinity ………..1/2marks
separation between L1 and L2 , 30+10=40cm…………………1/2 marks
the distance between L2 and L3 may take any value…….1/2 marks
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, RAIPUR REGION
FIRST PRE-BOARD EXAM (2024-25)
CLASS-XII SUBJECT – PHYSICS (042)
M M : 70 Time : 3 hrs

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS:-

(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.

(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D
and Section E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning
based of 1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section
C contains seven questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study
based questions of four marks each and Section E contains three long answer
questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one
question in Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in
Section D and all three questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the
choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
i. c = 3 x 108 m/s
ii. me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
iii. e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
iv. μ0 = 4π x 10-7 Tm𝑨−𝟏
v. h = 6.63 x10-34 Js
vi. ε0 = 8.854 x10-12 𝑪𝟐𝑵−𝟏𝒎−𝟐
vii. Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 𝟏𝟎 23 per gram mole

SECTION-A (16x1=16 marks)

Q.1 In a circuit the phase difference between the alternating current and the source voltage is 1
𝜋/2. Which of the following cannot be the element (s) of the circuit?
(a) only C
(b) only L (c) L and R (d) L or C

Q.2. The current in a device varies with time t as I = 6t ,where I is in mA and t is in s. The 1
amount of charge that passes through the device during t = 0 s to t = 3 s is
(a) 10 mC (b) 18 mC (c) 27 mC (d) 54 mC

Q.3. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is −4.2 × 10-6. The material is: 1
(a) ferromagnetic (b) paramagnetic (c) diamagnetic (d) none of the these
Q.4. Two wires carrying currents I1 and I2 lie, one 1
slightly above the other, in a horizontal plane as
shown in figure.
The region of vertically upward strongest
magnetic field is
(a) I
(b) II
(c) III
(d) IV

Q.5. A welder wears special glasses to protect his eyes mostly from the harmful effect of: 1
(a) very intense visible light (b) infrared radiation
(c) ultraviolet rays (d) microwaves

Q.6. A variable capacitor is connected to a 200 V battery. If its capacitance is changed from 1
2 μF to X μF, then decrease in energy of the capacitor is 2 x 10-2 J. The value of X is –

(a) 1 μF (b) 2 μF (c) 3 μF (d) 4 μF

Q.7. Which of the following is/are true for electromagnetic waves? 1

I.They transport energy.

II. They have momentum.
III. They travel at different speeds in air depending on their frequency.
(a) I and III (b) II only (c) I, II and III (d) I and II

Q.8. Consider the fusion reaction: 4He + 4He → 8Be +Q For the reaction, Atomic mass of 8Be is 1
8.0053 u and that of 4He is 4.0026 u. & 1u= 931 MeV/c2 then Q-value will be
(a) −9.31MeV (b) −93.1MeV (c) −9.31keV (d) −93.1keV

Q.9. Three charges 𝑞, −𝑞 and 𝑞0 are placed as shown in figure. 1

The magnitude of the net force on the charge 𝑞0 at point 𝑂
is 𝑘 =1/4πεO

(a) 0
(b) ) 2𝑘𝑞𝑞0/𝑎2
(c) √2𝑘𝑞𝑞0/𝑎2
(d) 𝑘𝑞𝑞0/√2𝑎2
Q.10 Two nuclei have their mass numbers in the ratio of 1 : 27. What is the ratio of their nuclear 1
densities?
(a) 1 : 27 (b) 1: 1 (c) 3: 1 (d) 1: 3
Q.11 Three rays (1,2,3) of different colours fall normally on 1
one of the sides of an isosceles right angled prism as
shown. The refractive index of prism for these rays is
1.39,1.47 and 1,52 respectively. In which of these rays get
internally reflected from surface AC
(a) 1 & 2 (b) 1 & 3 (c) 2 & 3 (d) only 1

Q.12. When similar ideal diodes D1 and D2 are connected as shown figure. The currents through 1
the resistance R of the circuits (i) and (ii), will be

(a) 10A & 0.1 A (b) 0.1 A & zero (c) 0.1 A , 0.1A (d) 10 A ,10 A

For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and other
labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the options as
given below.
a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is correct explanation of Assertion.
b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of
Assertion.
c) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) If both Assertion and Reason are false.

Q.13 Assertion (A): 𝐴 negative charge in an electric field moves along the direction of the 1
electric field.
Reason (R): On a negative charge a force acts in the direction of the electric field.

Q.14. Assertion (A) : In Young’s double slit experiment all fringes are of equal width. 1
Reason (R) : The fringe width depends upon wavelength of light (λ) used, distance of
screen from plane of slits (D) and slit separation (d).

Q.15. Assertion (A): The positively charged nucleus of an atom has a radius of almost 10−15m. 1
Reason (R): In a-particle scattering experiment, the distance of closest approach for a-
particles is ≃ 10−15m.

Q.16. Assertion (A) : Silicon is preferred over Germanium for making 1

semiconductor devices.
Reason (R) : The energy gap for Germanium is more than the energy gap for Silicon.

SECTION-B (5x2=10 marks)

Q.17. Write Maxwell's generalization of Ampere's Circuital law. Show that in the process of 2
charging a capacitor, the current produced within the plates of the capacitor is
𝑖 = 𝜀0 𝑑𝜙𝐸/dt where 𝜙𝐸 is the electric flux produced during charging of the capacitor plates.

Q.18. Two electric bulbs P and Q have their resistances in the ratio of 1:2. They are connected in 2
series across a battery. Find the ratio of the power dissipation in there bulbs.
 OR
An ammeter, together with an unknown resistance in series is connected across two
identical batteries, each of emf 1.5 V, connected (i) in series, and (ii) in parallel. If the
current recorded in the both cases be 1A calculate the internal resistance of battery.

Q.19. Two charged spherical conductors of radii R1 and R2 when connected by conducting wire 2
acquire charges q1 and q2 respectively. Find the ratio of their charge densities in terms of
their radii

Q.20. A device „X‟ is connected to an ac 2

source V = V0 sin ωt. The
variation of voltage, current and power in
one cycle is shown in the following graph

(a) Identify the device “X‟.

(b) Which of the curves A, B and C
represent the voltage, current and the
power consumed in the circuit?

Q.21. Draw the circuit diagram for studying the V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode in (i) 2
forward bias and (ii) reverse bias. Draw the typical V-I characteristics of a silicon diode in
both the cases.
SECTION-C (7x3=21 marks)
Q.22. A point object ' 𝑂 ' is kept in a medium of 3
refractive index 𝑛1 in front of a convex
spherical surface of radius of curvature 𝑅
which separates the second medium of
refractive index 𝑛2 from the first one as shown
in the figure. Draw the ray diagram showing
the image formation and deduce the
relationship between the object distance and
the image distance in terms of 𝑛1, 𝑛2 and 𝑅.

Q.23. Two large charged plane sheets of charge densities + σ and - σ C/m2 are arranged 3
vertically with a separation of distance ‘d’ between them. Deduce expressions for the
electric field at point (i) to the left of the first sheet , (ii) to the right side ot the second sheet
and (iii) between the sheets.

OR
In the figure given below, find the
(a) Equivalent capacitance of the network
between points A and B.
Given : C1 = C5 = 4 μF, C2 = C3 = C4 = 2 μF.
(b) maximum charge supplied by the battery,
and
(c) total energy stored in the network.
Q.24 (a) Sketch the graphs showing variations of stopping potential with frequency of incident 3
radiation for two photosensitive materials A and B having threshold frequencies νA > νB.
 (b) In which case is the stopping potential more and why? Given that both plate A and B
has same incident frequency.
(c) Does the slope of the graph depend on the nature of the material used? Explain.
Q.25. (a) The figure shows the variation of 3
photoelectric current (I) versus applied
voltage (V) for two photosensitive
materials and for two different
intensities of the incident radiation.
Identify the pairs of curves that
correspond to different materials for the
same intensity of incident
radiation. Justify your answer in brief.
(b) What is the wavelength of a photon of energy 3.3 x 10 -19 J ?

Q.26. The figure shows energy level diagram of 3

hydrogen atom.
(i) Find out the transition which results in the
emission of a photon of wavelength 496 nm
(ii) Which transition corresponds to the
emission of radiation of maximum
wavelength ? Justify your answer.

Q.27. Draw a labelled circuit diagram of a junction diode as a full wave rectifier. Explain its 3
underlying working. Depict the input and output wave forms.

Q.28. a) Using Biot- Savart law, write the expression for the magnetic field ‘B’ due to an element 3
‘dl’ carrying a current ‘I’ at a distance ‘r’ from it in vector form
b) A circular coil of ‘N’ turns and diameter ‘d’ carries a current ‘I’. It is unwound and rewound
to make another coil of diameter ‘2d’, current ‘I’ remaining the same. Calculate the ratio of the
magnetic moments of the new coil and the original coil.

SECTION-D (2x4=8 marks)

Case Study Based Questions
Questions number 29 and 30 are case study based questions. Read the following
paragraphs and answer the questions that follow
Q.29 MOVING COIL GALVANOMETER: 4
The galvanometer is a device used to detect the
current flowing in a circuit or a small potential
difference applied to it. It consists of a coil with
many turns, free to rotate about a fixed axis, in a
uniform radial magnetic field formed by using
concave pole pieces of a magnet. When current flows
through the coil, torque act on it.
 (i) What is the principle of moving coil galvanometer?
(a) Torque acting on a current carrying coil placed in a uniform magnetic field.
(b) Torque acting on a current carrying coil placed in a non-uniform magnetic field.
(c) Potential difference developed in the current carrying coil.
(d) None of these.

(ii) If the field is radial, then the angle between magnetic moment of galvanometer coil
and the magnetic field will be

(a) 0° (b) 30° (c) 60° (d) 900

(iii) Why pole pieces are made concave in the moving coil galvanometer?
(a) to make the magnetic field radial. (b) to make the magnetic field uniform.
(c) to make the magnetic field non-uniform. (d) none of these.

(iv) What is the function of radial field in the moving coil galvanometer?
(a) to make the torque acting on the coil maximum. (b) to make the magnetic field strong.
(c) to make the current scale linear. (d) All the above.

OR
If the rectangular coil used in the moving coil galvanometer is made circular, then what
will be the effect on the maximum torque acting on the coil in magnetic field for the same
area of the coil?
(a) remains the same (b) becomes less in circular coil
(c) becomes greater in circular coil (d) depends on the orientation of the coil

Q.30 Optical fibres: Now-a-days optical fibres are extensively used for transmitting audio and 4
video signals through long distances. Optical fibres too make use of the phenomenon of
total internal reflection. Optical fibres are fabricated with high quality composite
glass/quartz fibres. Each fibre consists of a core and cladding. The refractive index of the
material of the core is higher than that of the cladding. When a signal in the form of light is
directed at one end of the fibre at a suitable angle, it undergoes repeated total internal
reflections along the length of the fibre and
finally comes out at the other end. Since light undergoes total internal reflection at each
stage, there is no appreciable loss in the intensity of the light signal. Optical fibres are
fabricated such that light reflected at one side of inner surface strikes the other at an angle
larger than the critical angle. Even if the fibre is bent, light can easily travel along its
length. Thus, an optical fibre can be used to act as an optical pipe.
 i) Which of the following statement is not true.
a) Optical fibres is based on the principle of total internal reflection.
b) The refractive index of the material of the core is less than that of the cladding.
c) an optical fibre can be used to act as an optical pipe.
d) there is no appreciable loss in the intensity of the light signal while propagating through
an optical fibre.

ii) What is the condition for total internal reflection to occur?

a) angle of incidence must be equal to the critical angle.
b) angle of incidence must be less than the critical angle.
c) angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle.
d) None of the above.

iii) Which of the following is not an application of total internal reflection?

a) Mirage
b) Sparkling of diamond
c) Splitting of white light through a prism.
d) Totally reflecting prism.

(iv) condition for total internal reflection is .

a) light travel from rarer to denser & critical angle smaller than angle of incidence
b) light travel from rarer to denser & critical angle grater than angle of incidence
c) light travel from denser to rarer & critical angle smaller than angle of incidence
d) light travel from denser to rarer & critical angle greater than angle of incidence
OR
Optical fibres are used extensively to transmit
a) Optical Signal
b) current
c) Sound waves
d) None of the above

SECTION -E (3x5=15 marks)

Q.31 (i) State Kirchhoff’s rules. Use them to obtain 5
the condition of balance for a Wheatstone
bridge.
(ii) Use Kirchhoff’s rule to determine the
current flowing through the branches
MN, TO and SP in the circuit shown in the
figure.

OR
 (i) Derive the relation between the current density, electric field and the conductivity of a
conductor. Briefly explain with graph the variation of conductivity of a conductor with rise
in temperature.
(ii) Two conducting wires X and Y of same diameter but different materials are joined in
series across a battery. If the number density of electrons in X is twice that in Y. find the
ratio of drift velocities of electrons in the two wires.

Q.32. (i) Draw a labelled diagram of a step-down transformer. Name the principle of its working. 5
Eexpress the turn ratio in terms of voltages. Write one loss of transformer & how it
minimises.

(ii) How much current is drawn by the primary of a transformer connected to 220 V supply
when it delivers power to a 110 V- 550W refrigerator?
OR
(i) Define coefficient of self-induction. Obtain an expression for self-induction of a long
solenoid of length l, area of cross section A having N turns.
(ii) The magnetic flux linked with a coil (in Wb) is given by the equation:

ϕ = 5 t2 + 3 t + 16. Find The induced e.m.f. in the coil in the fourth second.

Q.33. (i) Draw a labelled ray diagram showing the image formation by a refracting telescope in 5
normal adjustment condition. Derive its magnifying power. Write two limitations of a
refracting telescope over reflecting telescope.
(ii) The magnifying power of an refracting telescope is 8 and the distance between the two
lenses is 54cm. Find the focal length of eye lens and objective lens.
OR
(a)Define wavefront. Use Huygens principle to verify the laws of refraction.
(b) A parallel beam of light of 500 nm falls on a narrow slit and the resulting diffraction
pattern is observed on a screen 1 m away. It is observed that the first minimum is at a
distance of 2.5 mm from the centre of the screen. Calculate the width of the slit.

………………………………………..
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN RANCHI REGION
PRE BOARD EXAMINATION (2024-25)
CLASS XII PHYSICS (042)
Maximum Marks: 70 Time allowed: 3 hours
General Instructions:
(1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section
E.
(3) All the sections are compulsory.
(4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based of
1 mark each, Section B contains five questions of two marks each, Section C contains seven
questions of three marks each, Section D contains two case study-based questions of four
marks each and Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
(5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one question in
Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all three
questions in Section E. You have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
(7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary
(i) c = 3 x 108 m/s
(ii) me = 9.1 x10-31 kg
(iii) mp = 1.7 x10-27 kg
(iv) e = 1.6 x 10-19 C
(v) µ0 = 4π x 10-7 T m A-1
(vi) h = 6.63 x10-34 J s
(vii) ε0 = 8.854 x10-12C2 N-1 m-2
(viii)Avogadro’s number = 6.023 X 1023 per gram mole
[SECTION - A] (16X1=16 marks)
Q1. A uniform electric field pointing in positive X-direction exists in a region. Let A be the origin,
B be the point on the X-axis at x = +1 cm and C be the point on the Y-axis at y = +1 cm. Then the
potential at points A, B and C satisfy.
(a) VA < VB (b) VA > VB. (c) VA < VC (d) VA > VC
Q2. Which of the following metals is used for making standard resistors?

(a) Copper (b) Iron (c) Manganin (d) Silver

1/7
Q3.The conversion of a moving coil galvanometer into a voltmeter is done by
(a) introducing a resistance of large value in series.
(b)introducing a resistance of small value in parallel.
(c) introducing a resistance of large value in parallel.
(d) introducing a resistance of small value in series.

Q4.Calculate the mutual inductance between two coils if a current 10 A in the primary coil
changes the flux by 500 Wb per turn in the secondary coil of 200 turns.
(a)10 H (b) 104 H (c) 1000 H (d) 100 H
Q5. Correct match of column I with column II is
Column-l (waves) Column-ll (Production)
(1) Infra-red P. Rapid vibration of electrons in aerials
(2) Radio Q. Electrons in atoms emit light when they move from higher to
lower energy level.
(3) Light R. Klystron valve
(4) Microwave S. Vibration of atoms and molecules
(a) 1-P, 2-R, 3-S, 4-Q (b) 1-S, 2-P, 3-O, 4-R
(c) 1-Q, 2-P, 3-S, 4-R (d) 1-S. 2-R, 3-P, 4-Q

Q6. Waves in decreasing order of their wavelength are

(a) radio waves, ultraviolet rays, visible rays, X-rays
(b) radio waves, visible rays, infrared rays, X-rays
(c) radio waves, infrared rays, visible rays, X-rays
(d) X-rays, infrared rays, visible rays, radio waves

Q7. The diffraction effect can be observed in

(a) sound waves only (b) light waves only
(c) ultrasonic waves only (d) sound waves as well as light waves
Q8. A point object is placed at the centre of a glass sphere of radius 6 cm and refractive index 1.5.
The distance of virtual image from the surface of the sphere is
(a) 2 cm (b) 4 cm (c) 6 cm (d) 12 cm

Q9. The stopping potential in an experiment on the photoelectric effect is 1.5 V. What is the
maximum kinetic energy of the photo electrons emitted?

(a ) 1.5 eV (b) 3 eV (c) 4.5 eV (d) 6 eV

Q10. Two point charges A and B , having charges +Q and -Q respectively , are placed at certain
distance apart and force acting between them is F . If 25% charge of A is transferred to B , then
the force between the charges becomes

(a) 9F/16 (b) 16F/9 (c) 4F/3 (d) F

Q11. The ratio of the energies of the hydrogen atom in its first to second excited state is:

(a) 1/4 (b) 4/9 (c) 9/4 (d) 4

Q12. The process in which two light nuclei combine to form a heavier nucleus is called:

(a) Fission (b) Fusion (c) Radioactive decay (d) Beta decay
 2/7

For Questions 13 to 16, two statements are given –one labeled Assertion (A)
and other labeled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from
the options as given below.
A. If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of Assertion.
B. If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
C. If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
D. If both Assertion and Reason are false.
Q13. Assertion (A): de Broglie's wavelength of a freely falling body keeps decreasing with time.
Reason (R): The momentum of the freely falling body increases with time.
Q14.Assertion (A):The magnetic field produced by a current - carrying solenoid is independent
of its cross sectional area.
Reason (R): The magnetic field inside the solenoid is uniform.
Q15.Assertion (A): In Young's double slit experiment, the fringes width for dark fringe is same
as that for bright fringes.
Reason (R): In Young's double slit experiment, when the fringes are formed with a
source of white light , then only dark and bright fringes are formed.
Q16. Assertion (A): The electrical conductivity of a semiconductor increases on doping.
Reason (R): Doping always increases the number of electrons in the semiconductor.
[SECTION – B] (5x2=10 marks)
Q17. Draw a graph showing the variation of resistance of a metal wire as a function of its
diameter keeping its length and material constant.
Q18. State the Lorenz’s magnetic force and express it in vector form. Which pair of vectors are
always perpendicular to each other ?
OR,
Two particles of equal masses have equal charges. Both these particles moving with velocities
V1 and V2 respectively in the same direction enter the same magnetic field acting normally to the
direction of their motion. If the two forces F1and F2 acting on them are in the ratio of 1:2, find the
ratio of their velocities.
Q19. The line AB in the ray diagram represents a lens. State with reason whether the lens is
convex or concave ?

(i) (ii)

3/7
Q20. A platinum surface having work function 5.63 eV is illuminated by a monochromatic source
of 1.6 x 10 15 Hz. What will be the minimum wavelength associated with the ejected
electron.
Q21.What are nuclear forces ? State any two characteristic properties of nuclear forces.
[SECTION – C ] (7x3=21 marks)
Q22. (i) An electric dipole is held in a uniform electric field. Using suitable diagram show that it
does not undergo any translatory motion. Derive the expression for the torque acting on
it.
(ii) What would happen if the field in non-uniform ?
(iii) What would happen if the external electric field is increasing
(a) parallel to p and (b) anti-parallel to p ?
Q23. Three capacitors of capacitances 2 pF, 3 pF and 4 pF are connected in parallel.

(a) Draw the circuit diagram and find the total capacitance of the combination?

(b) Determine the charge on each capacitor if the combination is connected to a 100 V supply.

Q24. An alpha particle and a proton moving with the same speed, enter the same magnetic field
region at right angles to the direction of the field.
(i) Show the trajectories followed by the two particles in the region of the magnetic field.
(ii) Find the ratio of the radii of the circular paths which the two particles may describe.

Q25. . Using Huygen’s construction draw a figure showing the propagation of a plane wavefront
reflecting at a plane surface. Show that the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of
reflection.
OR
Derive Snell’s law on the basis of Huygen’s wave theory when light is travelling from a rarer to
a denser medium/ Denser to rarer medium.
Q26. ( i ) Draw a labelled ray diagram of a compound microscope when image is formed at least
distance of distinct vision.
(ii ) Define its magnifying power
(iii) Deduce the expression for the magnifying power of the microscope.

Q27. The circuit shown in the figure consists of two diodes each with a forward resistance of 50
Ω and infinite backward resistance. Find the current through 100 Ω resistance for the given
circuits.
4/7
 Figure 1 Figure 2

Q28. Draw a labeled circuit diagram of a junction diode as a full wave rectifier. Explain its
underlying principle and working. Depict the input and output wave forms.

[SECTION D] (2x4=08 marks)

Q29. As shown in the figure a solenoid where the wire is coiled around a cylinder, each wire loop in this
coil acts as if it was a separate circular wire carrying the same current I, the current in the coiled wire and
the dense enough array of such loops may be approximated by a cylindrical current sheet with the
current density K = I × (N/L) = I × L(loops) /solenoid length. For simplicity, let’s assume a long solenoid
(length ≫ diameter) which we approximate as infinitely long. For a long solenoid (compared to its
diameter), the magnetic field inside the solenoid is approximately uniform and approximately parallel to
the axis, except near the ends of the solenoid. Outside the solenoid, the magnetic field looks like the field
of a physical dipole, with the North pole at one end of the solenoid and the South pole at the other end
and is approximately negligible.

(i ) Which of the following material can be used to make loops around the cylinder?
(a) Plastic (b) Glass (c) Quartz (d) copper
(ii) The magnetic field inside the solenoid is :
(a) Non-Uniform and parallel to the axis (b) Uniform and parallel to the axis
(c) Non-uniform and perpendicular to the axis (d) Uniform and perpendicular to the axis

(iii). A proton is moving from left to right direction and outside the solenoid, then what is the
direction of force on the proton?
(a) upwards (b) downwards (c) proton will not deflect (d) inwards
(iv) How the magnetic field inside the solenoid depends upon the number of turns?
(a) inversely proportional (b) directly proportional
(c) proportional to the number of turns (d) none of these
5/7
 OR,
The direction of magnetic field due to a solenoid can be determined by
(a) Ohm’s Law (b) Fleming’s left-hand rule
(c) Ampere’s Right-hand rule (d) Biot-savart’s Law
Q30. Minimum energy required to emit the electron from the surface of conductor
is called work function ( W or ϕ0 ) . It is measured in eV (electron volt). 1 eV- The energy gained
by an electron when it is accelerated by a potential difference of 1 volt. Methods of electron
emission- (i) Thermionic emission, (ii) Field emission, (iii) Secondary emission,(iv) Photoelectric
emission Work function (ϕ0)- The minimum energy that must be supplied to liberate the most
weakly bound surface electrons from a metal without giving them any velocity is called the work
function of the metal. Work function is measured in electron volt (eV). Work function depends on
the properties of metal and the nature of its surface.
(i) Photoelectric emission occurs only when the incident light has more than a certain
(a) power (b) wavelength (c) intensity (d) none of these

(ii) Light of wavelength λ falls on a metal having work function hc/λ 0 . Photoelectric effect will
take place only if:
(a) λ≥λο (b) λ≥2λο (c) λ≤λο (d) λ= 4λο

(iii) radio transmitter operates at a frequency 880 kHz and a power of 10 kW. The number of
photons emitted per second
(a) 1.72 × 1031 (b) 1.327 x 1025 (c) 1.327 x 107 (d) 1.327 x 1045

(iv) The threshold wavelength for photoelectric emission for a material is 3900Å Photo-
electrons will emitted when this material is illuminated with monochromatic radiation from:
(a) 50 W infrared lamp (b) 1 W infrared lamp
(c )1W ultraviolet lamp (d) none of these
OR,
1 eV is the energy gained by an electron when it is accelerated by a potential difference of 1volt. I
ts value in joule is
(a) 1.6 x 10-15 (b) 1.6 x 10-19 (c) 2.6 x 10-19 (d) none of these

[SECTION E] (3X5 = 15)

Q.31 (i) State Kirchhoff’s rules in electrostatics and explain on what basis they are justified ?
(ii) Determine the values of I1, I2 and I3 in the circuit given below.

6/7
 OR,
(i) Define internal resistance of a cell. Write any two factors on which it depends.
(ii)Two cells of emfs E1 and E2 and internal resistances r1 and r2 are connected in parallel as
shown in the figure.
(iii) Deduce an expression for the
(a) equivalent emf of the combination
(b) equivalent internal resistance of the combination
(c) potential difference between the points A and C
Q32. (i) Explain with the help of a labelled diagram, the principle and working of an ac generator
and obtain expression for the emf generated in the coil.
(ii) Draw a schematic diagram showing the nature of the alternating emf generated
by the rotating coil in the magnetic field during one cycle.
OR,
(i) Draw a schematic diagram of a step up/step down transformer. Explain its working principle.
Deduce the expression for the secondary to primary voltage in terms of the number of turns in the
two coils.
(ii)Describe briefly any two energy losses, giving the reason of their occurrence in actual
transformer. How are these reduced?

Q33.(i) Derive expression for the lens maker’s formula using necessary ray diagrams. Also state
the assumptions in deriving the above relation and the sign conventions used.
(ii) A double convex lens is made of a glass of refractive index 1.55, with both faces of the same
radius of curvature. Find the radius of curvature required, if the focal length is 20 cm.
OR,
(i) Draw a labelled ray diagram of an astronomical telescope when the final image is formed at
least distance of distinct vision.
(ii) Define its magnifying power and deduce the expression for the magnifying power of telescope.
(iii)You are given the following three lenses. Which two lenses will you use as an eyepiece and as
an objective to construct an astronomical telescope? Give reason.

7/7
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGTHAN VARANASI REGION
PRE-BOARD-I EXAMINATION (2024 –25)
CLASS- XII Maximum marks- 70
SUBJECT- PHYSICS Maximum time- 3 Hours

GeneralInstructions:
1) There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E.
3) All the sections are compulsory.
4) Section A contains sixteen questions, twelve MCQ and four Assertion Reasoning based of 1
mark each,
Section B contains five questions of two marks each,
Section C contains seven questions of three marks each,
Section D contains two case study-based questions of four marks each and
Section E contains three long answer questions of five marks each.
5) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in one question in
Section B, one question in Section C, one question in each CBQ in Section D and all three
questions in Section E.
6) Use of calculators is not allowed.
7) You may use the following values of physical constants where ever necessary:

c = 3 x 108 m/s h = 6.63 x 10-34Js

e = 1.6 x 10-19 C µ0 = 4π x 10-7 TmA-1
ɛ0 = 8.854 x 10-12 C2N-1m-2 Me = 9.1 x 10-31 kg
Mp = 1.673x 10-27 kg Mn = 1.675 x 10-27 kg
Q.No Questions Marks
Section A
1. Force between charges A and B is F. If 75% charge of A is transferred to B then 1
force between A and B is :

(a) F (b) F (c) 4F (d) None of these

4
2. On applying an electric field of 5 × 10−8 Vm−1 across a conductor, the current 1
density through it is 2.5 Am–2 The resistivity of the conductor is:
(a) 1 × 10−8 Ω m (b) 2 × 10−8 Ω m
(c) 0.5 × 10−8 Ω m (d) 12.5 × 10−8 Ω m
3. Which of the following is not the property of an equipotential surface? 1
(a)They do not cross each other.
(b)The work done in carrying a charge from one point to another on an
equipotential surface is zero.
(c)For a uniform electric field, they are concentric spheres.
d) They can be imaginary spheres.
4. Beams of electrons and protons move parallel to each other in the same direction, 1
They:
(a)Attract each other
(b)Repel each other
(c)Neither attract nor repel
(d)Force of attraction or repulsion depends upon speed of beams.
5. In the given circuit the reading of voltmeter V1and V2 are 300 volts each. The 1
reading of the voltmeter V3 and ammeter A are respectively:

(a) 220 V, 2.2 A (b) 150 V, 2.2 A (c) 100 V, 2.0 A (d) 220 V, 2.0 A
6. Amplitude of electric field in EM wave is give as E0 = 300 V/m. Amplitude of 1
magnetic field will be :
(a) 10–8 T (b) 10–6 T (c) 10–10 T (d) 10–7 T
7. The light sources used in Young’s double slit experiment are: 1
(a) Monochromatic (b) Coherent (c) White light (d) Incoherent.
A converging lens is used to form an image on a screen. When the upper half of the 1
8 lens is covered by an opaque screen:
(a) half the image will disappear.
(b) incomplete image will be formed.
(c) intensity of image will decrease but complete image is formed.
(d) intensity of image will decrease and smaller image is formed..
9. A point object is placed at centre of a glass sphere of radius 6 cm and refractive 1
index 1.5. The distance of virtual image from surface of sphere is :
(a) 2 cm (b) 4 cm (c) 6 cm (d) 12 cm
10. When a ray of light enters a glass slab from air: 1
a) its wavelength decreases
b) neither wavelength nor frequency changes
c) its wavelength increases
d) its frequency increases
11. The work function of a metal is 4.14 eV. The threshold wavelength for this 1
metal surface is:
(a) 4125 A0 (b) 2062.5 A0 (c)3000 A0 (d) 6000 A0
12. When a forward bias is applied to a p-n junction, it: 1
(a) raises the potential barrier.
(b) Reduces the majority carrier current to zero.
(c) lowers the potential barrier
(d) None of the above.
 For Questions 13 to16, two statements are given–one labeled Assertion (A) and
other labeled Reason(R).
Select the correct answer to these questions from the options a given below.
a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is correct explanation of
Assertion.
b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct
explanation of Assertion.
c) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
d) If both Assertion and Reason are false.
13. A: The mutual induction between the two coils infinitely apart is zero. 1
R: If the mutual induction between the two coils is zero, it means that their
self- inductances are also zero.
14. Assertion(A): The trajectory traced by an incident particle depends on the Impact 1
Parameter of collision.
Reason(R): The Impact Parameter is the perpendicular distance of the initial
velocity vector of the incident particle from the centre of the target
nucleus.
15. Assertion (A) – Nuclei having mass number about 60 are least stable. 1
Reason( R) – When two or more light nuclei are combined then binding energy per
nucleon will decrease.
16. Assertion (A) – Photo electric current depends on the intensity of incident light. 1
Reason(R)–Number of photo electrons emitted per second is directly proportional
to the intensity of incident radiation.
Section-B
17. An electric dipole having a dipole moment of 4 × 10 - 9 C m is placed in a uniform 2
electric field such that the dipole is in stable equilibrium. If the magnitude of the
electric field is3 × 10 3 N/C, what is the work done in rotating the dipole from a
position of stable equilibrium to a position of unstable equilibrium?
18. Draw a sketch of an electromagnetic wave propagating along the z-direction.Write 2
the expressions for electric and magnetic fields varying sinusoidally along X and Y
axes respectively.
OR
Name the constituent radiation of electromagnetic spectrum which
(a) Is used in satellite communication.
(b) Is used for studying crystal structure.
(c) Is similar to the radiations emitted during decay of radioactive nuclei?
(d) Has a wavelength range between 390 nm and 770 nm.
19. A solenoid with 500 turns and a cross-sectional area of 0.01 m2 is placed in a
changing magnetic field. The magnetic flux through the solenoid increases from 2
0.02 Wb to 0.06 Wb in 0.1 s. What is the average induced EMF in the solenoid?
20. Define threshold frequency. Two metals A and B have work functions 4 eV and 2
10 eV, respectively. Which metal has higher threshold wavelength justify your
answer?
21. Draw the graph between: 2
(i)Plate voltage and photocurrent when intensity of radiation is varying for constant
 frequency.
(ii) Stopping potential and frequency of radiation.
SectionC
22. State Kirchhoff’s rules. Find the value of R in the Wheatstone’s bridge shown in 3
figure if there is no deflection in the galvanometer.

23. Define drift speed of electron. Prove that the current density of a metallic 3
conductor is directly proportional to the drift speed of electrons.
24. A series ��� circuit is connected to an a.c. source having voltage � = Vo.Sin ωt. 3
Using phasor diagram, derive expressions for impedance, instantaneous current and
its phase relationship to the applied voltage. Also draw graphs of � and � versus ��
for the circuit.
25. Draw a neat ray diagram of refraction of light through equilateral prism and find 3
the expression for refractive index of material of prism. Draw the graph showing the
variation of angle of deviation with angle of incidence.
26. A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of focal length 2.0 cm and an 3
eyepiece of focal length 6.25 cm separated by a distance of 15 cm. How far from
the objective should an object be placed in order to obtain the final image at the
least distance of distinct vision (25 cm) Calculate the magnifying power of the
microscope?
(OR)
(i) A concave lens made of material of refractive index ‘n2’is held in a reference
medium of refractive index ‘n1’. Trace the path of parallel beam of light
passing through the lens when:
(a) n1 = n2 (b) n1 < n2 (c) n1 > n2.
(ii) Find the focal length of a combination of a convex lens of focal length 30 cm
and a concave lens of focal length 20 cm in contact?

27 Draw the circuit diagram of full wave rectifier, state its principle and draw the 3
input and output waveforms.
28 (i) Define potential barrier in PN-Junction diode. 3
(ii) In the following diagram, which bulb out of B1 and B2 will glow and which
will not glow? Justify your answer in each case.
 Section–D
Case Study Based Questions
29 MOVING COIL GALVANOMETER 4
Moving coil galvanometer is an electromagnetic device that can measure small
values of current. It is also known as Weston galvanometer. It works on the
principle that when a current loop is placed in an external magnetic field, it
experiences torque, and the value of torque can be changed by changing the current
in the loop.
A moving coil galvanometer consists of permanent horse-shoe magnets, coil, soft
iron core, pivoted spring, non-metallic frame, scale and pointer. We know that a
current loop having N number of turns, and the cross sectional area A, carrying
current i, when placed in and along the direction of external magnetic field B,
experiences a torque given by NiAB.

(i) In a moving coil galvanometer the deflection (Φ) on the scale by a pointer
attached to the spring is:

(ii) A moving coil galvanometer can be converted into an ammeter by:

(a) Introducing a resistance of large value in series.
(b) Introducing a shunt resistance of small value in parallel.
(c) Introducing a resistance of small value in series.
(d) Introducing a resistance of large value in parallel.
(iii) A galvanometer shows full deflection current for 5 mA. If the resistance of
galvanometer is 50 Ω then the resistance required to convert it into voltmeter
of range 5 V is:
 (a) 1050 Ω (b) 1000 Ω (c) 900 Ω (d) 950 Ω

(iv) Current sensitivity of Moving coil galvanometer doesn’t depends on

a) Resistance of coil b) number of turns in the coil
c) restoring torque per unit twist d) Magnetic field
OR
What is the shape of a magnet in moving coil galvanometer to make the radial
magnetic field?
(a) Convex cylindrical magnet (b) Horse-shoe magnet
(c) Concave cylindrical magnet (d) None
30 HAYDROGEN SPECTRUM 4
The emission spectrum of a chemical element or chemical compound is the
spectrum of frequencies of electromagnetic radiation emitted by an atom’s electrons
when they are returned to a lower energy state. Each element’s emission spectrum is
unique, and therefore spectroscopy can be used to identify elements present in
matter of unknown composition. Similarly, the emission spectra of molecules can
be used in chemical analysis of substances. The emission spectrum of atomic
hydrogen is divided into a number of spectral series, with wavelengths given by the
Rydberg formula.

(i) The value of maximum wavelength emitted in Lyman series is

(a) 1/R (b) 4/3R (c) 4/R (d) 3/4R
(ii) The wave numbers decreases from
(a) Lyman to Pfund series (b) Pfund series to Lyman series
(c) Brackett series to Balmer series (d) None of these
(iii) When an electron jumps in n=1 orbit, the series of spectral lines obtained is
called:
(a) Balmer Series (b) Pfund Series
(c) Brackett Series (d) Lyman Series

(iv) Which of the series lies in U.V region of electromagnetic spectrum?

(a) Lyman (b) Balmer (c) Paschen (d) Brackett

OR

Which of the series lies in Visible region of electromagnetic spectrum?

 (a) Lyman (b) Balmer (c) Paschen (d) Brackett

Section-E
31 (i) Using Gauss Law, derive an expression for the Electric Field Intensity at any 5
point outside a uniformly charged spherical shell of radius R and carrying
charge q, with the help of suitable diagram.
(ii) A uniformly charged spherical shell of 2.5 m radius has a surface charge
density of 100µC/m2. Calculate the Charge on the sphere and Total electric
flux passing through thesphere.
OR
(i) An electric dipole of dipole moment p consists of point charges + q and – q
separated by a distance 2a apart. Deduce the expression for the electric field E
due to the dipole at a distance x from the centre of the dipole on its axial line
in terms of the dipole moment p. What is the electric field at midpoint of
dipole?
(ii) A sphere S1 of radius r1 encloses a net charge Q. If there is another concentric
sphere S2 of radius r2 (r2> r,) enclosing charge 2Q, find the ratio of the electric
flux through S1 and S2. How will the electric flux through sphere S1 change if
a medium of dielectric constant K is introduced in the space in between S1 and
S2 in place of air?

(i) State Ampere’s circuital law and using it find magnetic field due to straight 5
32 infinite current carrying wire.
(ii) Draw a graph between magnetic field and perpendicular distance of
observation point from the wire
(iii) A long straight wire in the horizontal plane carries a current of 15A in north
to south direction. Find the magnitude and direction of magnetic field at a
point 2.5m east of the wire.
OR
(i) Derive the expression of force between two infinitely long parallel current
carrying conductors, hence define one ampere of current.
(ii) A square loop of side 20 cm carrying current of 1A is kept near an infinite
long straight wire carrying a current of 2A in the same plane as shown in the
figure. Calculate the magnitude and direction of the net force exerted on the
loop due to the current carrying conductor.
33 (i) Using Huygens wave theory of light, derive Snell’s law of refraction. What is
the shape of the wave front in each of the following cases: 5
a.Light emerging out of a convex lens when a point source is placed at its
focus.
b.The portion of the wave front of light from a distant star intercepted by
the Earth
(ii) A light ray entering a right-angled prism undergoes refraction at the face AC
as shown in Fig.
What is the refractive index of the material of the prism in fig.

OR
(i) Draw a labelled diagram of image formation by a compound microscope and
write the expression for magnification produced by compound microscope
(ii) In Young’s double-slit experiment using monochromatic light of wavelength
λ, the intensity of light at a point on the screen where path difference is λ,
is K units. What is the intensity of light at a point where path difference
is λ/3?
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN VARANASI REGION
PRE-BOARD-I EXAMINATION: 2024 – 25
MARKING SCHEME
CLASS-XII (PHYSICS)
Q.NO ANSWER Marks
.
1 (b) F 1
2 (b) 2 × 10−8 Ω m 1
3 (c) For a uniform electric field, they are concentric spheres. 1
4 (b) repel to each other 1
5 (a) 220 V, 2.2 A 1
6 (b) 10–6 T 1
7 (b) Coherent 1
8 (c) intensity of image will decrease but complete image is formed 1
9 (c) 6 cm 1
10 a) its wavelength decreases 1
11 ( c ) 3000A 0 1
12 (c) lowers the potential barrier 1
13 (c) If Assertion is true but Reason is false. 1
14 b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of 1
Assertion..
15 a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is correct explanation of Assertion 1
16 a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is correct explanation of Assertion 1
17 Workdone W= 2pE 1
Calculation ½
W= 2.4 x 10 -6 J ½
18

½+½
E = Eo.Sin (ωt – kz) and B = Bo. Sin (ωt – kz)
(½ + ½
OR +½ +
Radio wave, X rays, γ rays , visible light ½)
19 Emf, e = -N (Φ2-Φ1)/t 1
Calculation ½
E= -200 V ½

20 Correct Definition 1
Metal A has greater threshold wavelength ½
Justification E α 1/λ ½
½
21 Correct Graph 1
Correct graph 1
22 Correct statements 2
Balance condition of wheat stone bridge- P/Q = R/S ½
R= 200 Ohm ½
23 The average velocity with which free electrons drifted towards the positive end of the 1
wire in the presence of external electric field and opposite to electric field.
Derivation

24 Phasor Diagram ½
Correct derivation 2
Correct graph ½

25
Ray diagram ½
.
Sin
A +δm
2
For Correct derivation μ = A
2
Sin
2

Graph between i and δ ½

26 Focal length of the objective lens, = 2.0 cm

Focal length of the eyepiece, = 6.25 cm

Distance between the objective lens and the

eyepiece, d= 15 cm
Least distance of distinct vision,
∴Image distance for the eyepiece, = – 25 cm

Object distance for the eyepiece =

Using lens formula, we have the relation:
1
u2 = -5 cm
Image distance for the objective lens,
1
v1 = 10 cm
Object distance for the objective lens =
According to the lens formula, we have the
relation:
Magnitude of the object distance, = 2.5 cm 1
Using formula of magnifying
Hence, the magnifying power of the microscope
is 20.

1
 OR 1
(i) Correct diagram in each case
1
(ii) 1/f = 1/f1 + 1/f2

Calculation for f = - 12 cm

2 27 Correct circuit diagram 1

Principle of rectifier 1
Correct wave forms ½+½

28 (i) Correct definition 1

(ii) Bulb B1 will glow as diode D1 is forward biased so current is passed through B1 1
Bulb B2 will not glow as D2 is reverse biased so current will not flow through B2 1
29 (i) c 1
(ii) b 1
(iii) d 1
(iv) a OR c 1

30 (i) b 1
(ii) a 1
(iii) d 1
(iv) a OR b 1
31 (i) Derivation for electric field inside the sphere with suitable diagram. 2
(ii) By σ = q / 4πR2 ½
Calculation for q = 7.85 x 10-3 C 1
Φ = q/ ɛ0 ½
Calculation for Φ = 8.87x108 Nm2/C 1

OR
(i) Diagram for axial position ½
Derivation for electric field in axial position.. 2
Electric field at midpoint is zero. ½

(ii) Φ = q / ɛ0 ½
Calculation for Φ1/ Φ2 = 1/3 1
No change as the medium is outside S1 ½
32 (i) Statement of Amperes law ½
Derivation of magnetic field with diagram 1½
(ii) Correct Graph with labelling of axes. 1
(iii) Calculation for B = 1.2 x 10-6 T 1½
Direction - Vertically upward ½
OR
(i) Derivation for force between two parallel conductors with diagram. 2
Definition of Ampere 1
(ii) Calculation for F1 = 8 x 10-7 N (Attractive)
F2 = 2.6 x 10-7 N (Repulsive) 2
Net force F = F1 – F2 = 5.4 x 10-7 N (Attractive)

33 (i) Correct derivation of Snell’s law with diagram. 2

Correct diagrams for (a) and (b) ½+½
(ii) Identification of i = 450 ½
µ = 1/ Sin ic ½
Calculation of µ = 1.414 1
OR
(i) Ray diagram of compound microscope 1½
Expression of magnifying power ½
(ii) For path diff = λ, phase difference = 2π ½
By using ½
1
For I 1 = I2 = I
Resultant intensity = 4I = K (given)
½
Now for path diff = λ/3, phase diff = 2π/3
½
New intensity I’ = I = K/4